Agilent Technologies Yard Vacuum 86140B User Manual

Agilent 86140B Series  
Optical Spectrum Analyzer  
Users Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Considerations  
General Safety Considerations  
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with the standards  
listed on the Manufacturers Declaration of Conformity, and has been supplied  
in a safe condition. The documentation contains information and warnings  
that must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the  
product in a safe condition.  
Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided.  
This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water.  
This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the  
enclosure.  
WARNING  
If t his product is not used as specified, t he prot ection provided by t he  
equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a normal  
condition ( in which all means for prot ect ion are intact ) only.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
No operat or serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified  
service personnel. To prevent elect rical shock do not remove covers.  
This is a Safet y Class 1 Product ( provided wit h a protective eart hing  
ground incorporated in the power cord) . The mains plug shall only be  
insert ed in a socket out let provided wit h a protect ive earth cont act.  
Any interruption of the prot ective conductor inside or out side of the  
inst rument is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional  
int erruption is prohibit ed.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the inst rument from mains  
before cleaning. Use a dry clot h or one slightly dampened wit h wat er  
to clean t he external case part s. Do not at tempt t o clean int ernally.  
Fiber-optic connectors are easily damaged when connected to dirty or  
damaged cables and accessories. The Agilent 86140B seriess front-panel INPUT  
connector is no exception. When you use improper cleaning and handling  
techniques, you risk expensive instrument repairs, damaged cables, and  
compromised measurements. Before you connect any fiber-optic cable to the  
Agilent 86140B series, refer to Cleaning Connections for Accurate  
Measurementson page 6-8.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General Safety Considerations  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution  
Degree 2 per IEC 61010-1C and 664 respectively.  
Do not use too much liquid in cleaning the optical spectrum analyzer. Water can  
enter the front-panel keyboard, damaging sensitive electronic components.  
VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: When installing the product in a cabinet, the  
convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient  
temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating  
temperature of the product by 4° C for every 100 watts dissipated in the  
cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts,  
then forced convection must be used.  
CAUTION  
Install the instrument so that the detachable power cord is readily identifiable  
and is easily reached by the operator. The detachable power cord is the  
instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the mains circuit from the  
mains supply before other parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is  
only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch. Alternatively, an externally  
installed switch or circuit breaker (which is readily identifiable and is easily  
reached by the operator) may be used as a disconnecting device.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this instrument.  
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause  
instrument damage.  
Do n ot connect ac power until you have verified the line voltage is correct as  
described in Line Power Requirementson page 1-11. Damage to the  
equipment could result.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply voltage  
is within the specified range.  
The Agilent 86140B, 86141B, 86144B, 86146B and 86142B Option 004/005/006  
EELED sources contain an IEC Class 1 LED, according to IEC 60825.  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those  
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
1 Gett ing Started  
Setting Up the Analyzer 1-8  
2 Using t he Instrument  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements 2-14  
Analyzer Operating Modes 2-30  
5 St at us Listings  
Overview 5-2  
OSA Notices 5-16  
6 Maint enance  
Changing the Printer Paper 6-2  
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure 6-4  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements 6-8  
Returning the Instrument for Service 6-21  
Contents-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7 Specificat ions and Regulat ory Informat ion  
Definition of Terms 7-3  
Specifications 7-5  
Regulatory Information 7-21  
Declaration of Conformity 7-22  
Contents-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Setting Up the Analyzer 1-8  
Making a Measurement 1-13  
The Menu Bar 1-17  
The Softkey Panels 1-18  
Laser Safety Considerations 1-29  
Product Options and Accessories 1-30  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Product Overview  
Product Overview  
The 86140B series of optical spectrum analyzers provide fast, accurate, and  
comprehensive measurement capabilities for spectral analysis.  
Full-featured SCPI commands for programming instruments over LAN  
Display-off feature for making faster measurements  
Remote file saving and printing for outputting measurement results  
Filter mode for accurate and flexible measurements  
Built-in applications for accelerating test times  
Filter Mode  
The Agilent 86144B and 86146B filter mode allows single dense wavelength  
division multiplexing (DWDM) to be isolated and routed to external test  
equipment. The filter mode capability is built-in to internal applications to  
allow for fast and easy implementation of channel dropping. For Agilent  
86146B instruments, this mode also allows the ability to measure time resolve  
chirp (TRC).  
Built-in  
Applications  
Built-in applications allow fast, repeatable measurements for WDM systems,  
lasers, amplifiers, and passive components. These applications can be added  
through a firmware upgrade.  
WDM Applica tion  
This application allows you to measure DWDM sub-system components, (such  
as transmission sub-systems, optical add/drop multiplexers, and multiplexers/  
de-multiplexers) for parameters such as optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR),  
channel wavelength, channel power, and span tilt.  
Pa ssive Component Test Applica tion  
This application simplifies the testing of passive components, such as filters,  
couplers, and isolators by defining a test plan that measures parameters such  
as insertion and return loss, bandwidth, and filter shape.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Product Overview  
Source Test Applica tion  
This application offers automated optical source and laser characterization.  
Amplifier Test Applica tion  
This application simplifies the process of characterizing gain and noise figure  
of optical amplifiers such as EDFAs, SOAs and Raman amplifiers.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Product Overview  
Agilent 86140B Front and Rear Panels  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Product Overview  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Product Overview  
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Display  
Figure 1-1. Optical Spectrum Analyzer Display  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Product Overview  
Figure 1-2. Display Annotations  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Setting Up the Analyzer  
Setting Up the Analyzer  
St ep 1. Receive and Inspect t he Shipment  
Table 1-1. Items in a Standard Agilent 86140B Series Shipment  
Item  
Quantity  
Description  
Product Number  
BNC Cable (24 inches)  
GPIB Cable  
8120-1839  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
8120-3444  
FC/PC Dust Cap  
1401-0291  
English User’s Guide Manual  
Application Guide  
Programming Guide  
Quick Start Card  
86140-90068  
86140-90071  
86140-90069  
86140-90087  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Started  
Setting Up the Analyzer  
Inspect the shipping container for damage.  
Inspect the instrument.  
Keep the shipping container and cushioning material until you have inspected  
the contents of the shipment for completeness and have checked the optical  
spectrum analyzer mechanically and electrically.  
If anything is missing or defective, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies  
Sales Office. Refer to Returning the Instrument for Serviceon page 6-21. If  
the shipment was damaged, contact the carrier, then contact the nearest Agi-  
lent Technologies Sales Office. Keep the shipping materials for the carriers  
inspection. The Agilent Technologies Sales Office will arrange for repair or  
replacement at Agilent Technologiesoption without waiting for claim settle-  
ment.  
St ep 2. Connect Accessories and Power Cord  
Although you can operate all instrument functions using only the front-panel  
keys, and trackball on portable models, these accessories make your optical  
spectrum analyzer easier to use. Connect any standard PC-compatible mouse  
(or other pointing device), keyboard, or external VGA-compatible display.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Setting Up the Analyzer  
CAUTION  
Do not stack other objects on the keyboard; this will cause self-test failures on  
power-on.  
You can connect a PCL-language printer (for example, an HP1 LaserJet) to the  
instruments rear panel Parallel connector. Use a parallel Centronics printer ca-  
ble, such as an HP C2950A (2 m) or HP C2951A (3 m).  
The line cord provided is matched by Agilent Technologies to the country of  
origin on the order. Refer to Accessorieson page 1-31.  
1. HP and Hewlett-Packard are U.S. registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Setting Up the Analyzer  
Table 1-2. Line Power Requirements  
Power  
115 VAC: 110 VA MAX. / 60 WATTS MAX. / 1.1 A MAX.  
230 VAC: 150 VA MAX. / 70 WATTS MAX. / 0.6 A MAX.  
Voltage  
nominal: 115 VAC / 230 VAC  
range 115 VAC: 90132 V  
range 230 VAC: 198254 V  
Frequency  
nominals: 50 Hz / 60 Hz  
range: 4763 Hz  
St ep 3. Apply Power t o Inst rument  
Press the power switch at the lower left-hand corner of the front panel.  
After a short initialization period, the display will look similar to the picture on  
this page.  
Allow the instrument to warm up for at least 1 hour.  
St ep 4. Clean Connect ors and Prepare for Measurement s  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
damaged cables and accessories. The front-panel INPUT connector of the  
Agilent 86140B series is no exception. When you use improper cleaning and  
handling techniques, you risk expensive instrument repairs, damaged cables,  
and compromised measurements. Before you connect any fiber-optic cable to  
the Agilent 86140B series optical spectrum analyzer, refer to Cleaning  
Connections for Accurate Measurementson page 6-8.  
A front-panel connector saver is provided with Agilent 86140B series  
instruments. Attach the connector saver to the front-panel INPUT connector of  
the instrument. You can now make your connections to the connector saver  
instead of the instrument. This will help prevent damage to the front-panel  
INPUT connector of the instrument. Damage to the front-panel INPUT connector  
is expensive in terms of both repair costs and down-time. Use the front-panel  
connector saver to prevent damage to the front-panel INPUT connector.  
Note  
All product specifications apply to measurements made without using the front-panel  
connector saver.  
After the instrument has warmed up for at least 1 hour, perform an auto align  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Started  
Setting Up the Analyzer  
by pressing the front panel Auto Align button. This will ensure optimal ampli-  
tude accuracy, and can correct for any mis-alignment caused by the instrument  
shipment.  
To learn more about this or any Agilent Technologies product, visit our web  
site at http://www.agilent.com/cm/index.shtml. Or, to learn more about fiber  
optic test equipment, follow this path from the address listed:  
1 Click Communications Products.  
2 Click Lightwave Measurement Solutions.  
3 Click Communications Solutions and then select Optical and Photonic  
Solutions.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Making a Measurement  
Making a Measurement  
This procedure will introduce you to the Agilent 86140B series optical spec-  
trum analyzer front panel controls. By following this procedure you will do the  
following:  
Perform an auto alignment  
Perform a peak search  
Use a delta marker  
Print the display  
Refer to The Menu Baron page 1-17 and The Softkey Panelson page 1-18.  
Instrument setup  
A source signal must be present at the input of the optical spectrum analyzer.  
In this procedure a Fabry-Perot laser is used as the source. You can use  
another source or the optional 1310/1550 nm EELED. If another source is being  
used, the display will differ from those shown.  
To set the OSA to a known sta te  
Press the front-panel Preset key to set the instrument to a known state. For  
a complete description of preset conditions, see page 3-65.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Making a Measurement  
To per for m a n Auto Align  
For maximum amplitude accuracy, perform an automatic alignment whenever  
changes, or following warm-up. See Auto Alignon page 3-10 for more infor-  
mation.  
1 Connect a fiber from the source to the input connector of the optical spectrum  
analyzer. Be sure to follow the good connector practices described in Cleaning  
Connections for Accurate Measurementson page 6-8.  
2 Enable the source. Press Markers > Peak Search to find the peak signal power.  
3 Press the front-panel Auto Align key to optimize the detection of the incoming  
signal. This takes a few moments to complete.  
To perform a pea k sea r ch  
4 Press the front-panel Auto Meas key to locate and zoom-in on the signal. Please  
wait until the Auto Measure routine is complete. A marker is placed on the peak  
of the displayed signal.  
Trace with normal marker.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting Started  
Making a Measurement  
To zoom in on the signa l  
Press the Span softkey and then use the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to  
zoom in on the signal.  
Using the delta ma r ker  
The optical spectrum analyzer has four types of markers; normal markers,  
bandwidth markers, delta markers and noise markers. The marker currently  
being displayed is a normal marker. In the next step we will use it as a delta  
marker.  
5 Press the front-panel Markers key.  
6 Press the More Marker Functions.... softkey.  
7 Press the Delta Marker softkey to activate the delta marker and the active  
function area.  
8 Use the knob, step keys or numeric entry pad to move the delta marker.  
9 The reference marker remains stationary.  
Trace with delta marker.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Making a Measurement  
Printing the displa y  
10 Press the Print key to print a copy of the display. The output will be sent to the  
internal or external printer, depending on the printer selected.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Menu Bar  
The Menu Bar  
The Menu bar includes the File, Measure, Application, and Options drop-down  
menus. Each menu selection includes a descriptive label.  
( Action)  
Indicates the selection will perform an action such as  
making a measurement or printing the display.  
( Panel)  
Indicates the selection will open a softkey panel.  
The File Menu  
The Measure  
Menu  
The Applicat ions  
Menu  
The Options Menu  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Softkey Panels  
menu bar. This section includes brief descriptions of the following menus. See  
Chapter 3, Function Referencefor additional information on each of the  
OSA functions.  
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus 1-22  
The Markers Menus 1-23  
The Save/Recall Menus 1-24  
The Systems Menus 1-25  
The Traces Menus 1-27  
The Wavelength Menus 1-28  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Amplitude Menus  
You can access the Amplitude softkeys using the front-panel Amplitude key or  
the Measure menu Amplitude selection on the menu bar.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Applications Menus  
You can access the Applications (Appls) softkeys by using the front-panel  
Appls key or the Applications menu Launch an Installed Application section on  
the menu bar. For a complete description of the applications, refer to the Agi-  
lent 86140B Series Measurement Applications Users Guide that came with  
your instrument.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Bandwidth/Sweep Menus  
You can access the Bandwidth/Sweep softkeys by using the front-panel Band-  
width/Sweep key or the Measure menu Bandwidth/Sweep selection on the  
menu bar.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Markers Menus  
You can access the Markers softkeys by using the front-panel Markers key or  
the Measure menu Markers selection on the menu bar.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Save/Recall Menus  
You can access the Save/Recall softkeys and setup panels by using the drop-  
down File menu Save/Recall selection or the front-panel Save/Recall key. Use  
these functions to save, recall and print the measurement results.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Systems Menus  
You can access the System softkeys by using the front-panel System key or the  
Options menu System selection on the menu bar.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Systems Menus, continued....  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Traces Menus  
You can access the Traces softkeys by using the front-panel Traces key or the  
Measure menu Traces selection on the menu bar.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The Softkey Panels  
The Wavelength Menus  
You can access the Wavelength softkeys by using the front-panel Wavelength  
key or the Measure menu Wavelength selection on the menu bar.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Laser Safety Considerations  
Laser Safety Considerations  
NOTE  
Refer to the Tu nable Laser Modu les Users Gu ide for complete laser safety  
information.  
Laser Safety  
Laser radiation in the ultraviolet and far infrared parts of the spectrum can  
cause damage primarily to the cornea and lens of the eye. Laser radiation in  
the visible and near infrared regions of the spectrum can cause damage to the  
retina of the eye.  
WARNING  
Do NOT, under any circumst ances, look int o t he opt ical out put or any  
fiber/device at tached to the out put while t he laser is in operat ion.  
This system should be serviced only by authorized personnel.  
Do not enable the laser unless fiber or an equivalent device is attached to the  
optical output connector.  
CAUTION  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those  
specified herein can result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Electrical Safet y  
The electrical safety considerations are documented in the section General  
Safety Considerationson page -iii. Familiarize yourself with the safety mark-  
ings and instructions before operating this system.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Started  
Product Options and Accessories  
Product Options and Accessories  
Options  
Agilent 86140B, 86141B,  
86142B, 86146B  
Benchtop  
Agilent 86143B, 86144B,  
86145B  
Portable  
Inst rument Syst em Opt ions  
Current Source  
White Light Source  
Opt. 001  
Opt. 002  
Opt. 004  
Opt. 005  
Opt. 006  
----  
----  
----  
----  
Opt. 006  
Not Applicable  
Included  
Included  
Included  
Included  
Built-in 1310 & 1550 nm EELED Source  
Built-in 1550 nm EELED Source  
Wavelength Calibrator  
Time Resolved Chirp Application  
DWDM Spectral Analysis Application  
Passive Component Test Application  
Amplifier Test Application  
Source Test Application  
Alternative Connector Interface  
FC/PC  
a
Opt. TRC  
Included  
Included  
Included  
Included  
Standard  
Opt. 011  
Opt. 013  
Opt. 014  
Opt. 017  
Standard  
Opt. 011  
Opt. 013  
Opt. 014  
Opt. 017  
HMS-10  
DIN  
ST  
SC  
Multimode Fiber Inputb  
Certificate of Calibration  
Opt. 025 (Agilent 86140B)  
Included  
Opt. 025 (Agilent 86143B)  
Included  
a. Option available for 86146B only.  
b. 50µm multimode input available on Agilent 86140B and 86143B OSAs only.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Product Options and Accessories  
Table 1-3. Accessories  
Description  
Item  
Product Number  
Option  
Quantity  
Connect or Accessories  
011  
HP/HMS-10 Connector Adapter  
HMS-10 Dust Cap  
08154-61701  
1401-0291  
3
3
012  
FC/PC Connector Adapter  
FC/PC Dust Cap  
Angled to Flat, FC/PC Adapter  
08154-61702  
1401-0291  
1250-3175  
3
3
1
013  
014  
017  
DIN Optical Connector Adapter  
DIN Dust Cap  
08154-61703  
1401-0291  
3
3
ST Optical Connector Adapter  
ST Dust Cap  
08154-61704  
1401-0291  
3
3
SC Optical Connector Adapter  
SC Dust Cap  
08154-61708  
1401-0291  
3
3
Power Selection  
900  
901  
902  
903  
906  
912  
917  
918  
919  
920  
921  
922  
Power Cord (United Kingdom)  
8120-8705  
8120-0696  
8120-1692  
8120-1521  
8120-2296  
8120-2957  
8120-4600  
8120-4754  
8120-5181  
8120-6868  
8120-6979  
8120-8377  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Power Cord (Australia, New Zealand, China)  
Power Cord (Europe)  
Power Cord (United States)  
Power Cord (Switzerland)  
Power Cord (Denmark)  
Power Cord (South Africa, India)  
Power Cord (Japan)  
Power Cord (Israel)  
Power Cord (Argentina)  
Power Cord Chilean)(  
Power Cord (China)  
Documentation and Manuals  
ABC  
Traditional Chinese Users Guide  
Traditional Chinese Application Guide  
86140-90067  
86140-90066  
1
Cert ificat ion of Calibrat ion and Service  
1BM  
UK6  
Standard Commercial Calibration Certificate  
Commercial Calibration Certificate with Test Data  
Extended Warranty to 3 Years Return for Service  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
1
1
W30  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Product Options and Accessories  
Table 1-4. Available Fiber Sizes  
Option 002a  
(White Light  
Source)  
Option 004a  
(1310/1550  
EELED)  
Option 005a  
(1550  
EELED)  
Model  
Number  
Optical  
Input  
Option 006  
(Calibrator)  
Photo-  
diode  
Input  
Mono  
Output 1  
86143B  
Opt 025  
86145B  
86140B  
Opt 025  
86142B  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
9 µm  
9 µm  
50 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
62,5 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
50 µm  
9 µm  
50 µm  
9 µm  
62,5 µm  
62,5 µm  
62,5 µm  
62,5 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
9 µm  
N/A  
N/A  
b
62,5 µm 62,5 µm  
50 µm 9 µm  
86141B  
86144B/  
86146B  
a. Options 002, 004, and 005 are exclusive  
b. Only one option is available on the 86141B  
Table 1-5. Additional Parts and Accessories  
Agilent Benchtop OSA  
86140B, 86141B, 86142B,  
86146B  
Agilent Portable OSA  
86143B, 86144B, 86145B  
Printer Paper (5 rolls/box)  
9270-1370  
9270-1370  
Additional Connector Interfaces  
External 10 dB Attenuator (FC/PC)  
Rack-Mount Flange Kit  
See Agilent 81000 series  
Opt. 030  
See Agilent 81000 series  
Opt. 030  
Opt. AX4  
N/A  
Transit Case  
9211-2657  
N/A  
9211-5604  
Opt. 042  
Soft Carrying Case  
BenchLink Lightwave Softwarea  
Standard  
Standard  
a. Agilent N1031A BenchLink Lightwave allows transfer of measurement results over a GPIB Interface to a PC for the purposes of  
archiving, printing, and further analysis.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Product Options and Accessories  
Front Panel Fiber-Optic Adapters  
Front Panel  
Fiber-Optic Adapter  
Description  
Agilent Part Number  
Diamond HMS-10  
08154-61701  
a
08154-61702  
08154-61708  
08154-61703  
08154-61704  
08154-61705  
FC/PC  
SC  
DIN  
ST  
Biconic  
a. The FC/PC is the default front-panel optical connector.  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Product Options and Accessories  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Setting Up Measurements 2-2  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements 2-14  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files 2-19  
Analyzing Measurement Data 2-27  
Analyzer Operating Modes 2-30  
Using the Instrument  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Setting Up Measurements  
This section contains the following information that will help you set up a  
wavelength measurement:  
Adjusting Setup Conditions  
Operating the Internal White Light Source  
Averaging Traces  
Setting Video Bandwidth  
Using Span to Zoom In  
Setting the Sensitivity  
Triggering a Measurement  
Moving the Active Function Area  
Indicating an Update is Needed  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Adjusting Setup Conditions  
Setup panels allow you to adjust setup conditions which are not frequently  
changed. Refer to Preseton page 3-65.  
Using t he soft keys  
Arrows allow you to navigate from field to field in the dialog box. The high-  
lighted parameter can be changed. The front-panel number keys, step keys,  
and knob allows the user to enter a numeric value in the highlighted field.  
Select selects the highlighted parameter. You can enter values for a selected  
parameter using the front panel knob or numeric entry pad.  
Defaults resets the parameters to their default condition.  
Close Panel saves the current setup and returns you to the previous menu.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Operating the Internal White Light Source  
For Option 002 only  
Option 002 provides a built-in white light source which is a stable, broadband  
light source for swept-wavelength stimulus response testing from 900 nm to  
1700 nm. The light source is ideal to perform stimulus-response measure-  
ments, and measure photodetector responsivity. Refer to Light Sourceon  
page 3-33.  
No t e  
Although the light sources lamp lasts an exceptionally long time, turn off the  
light when not in use to extend the lamps lifetime. On the front panel, press  
System, Optimum, Light Source, Select off.  
1 From the front panel, press System > Options > Light Source > Select Off.  
Performing Stimulus-Response Mea surements  
Stimulus-response measurements characterize optical components for loss  
(or gain) versus wavelength. You can characterize devices such as couplers,  
switches, filters, fibers, and amplifiers.  
To perform stimulus-response measurements, you must have an amplitude-  
stable broadband light source. Although a white-light source provides the wid-  
est wavelength input for stimulus-response measurements, you can also use  
an LED or the spontaneous emission from an optical amplifier.  
The displayed response is a convolution of the analyzers resolution bandwidth  
and the amplitude response of the device under test. Because of this convolu-  
tion, the analyzers resolution bandwidth affects both dynamic range and the  
ability to resolve large amplitude changes versus wavelength. Wide resolution  
bandwidths increase the ability to resolve large amplitude changes.  
You can display two responses at the same time. The output response versus  
wavelength is displayed. The displayed trace shows the ratio of the output  
power to the input power expressed as a logarithm (dB).  
output power  
in pu t power  
æ
è
ö
ø
response (dB) = 10 log ------------------------------------  
Making ratioed measurements is sometimes referred to as normalization. Nor-  
malized measurements are used to negate wavelength dependencies in the  
source. The ratio is achieved through simple trace subtraction using logarith-  
mic amplitude scales. This is possible because of the following logarithmic  
equality:  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
A
æ ö  
log --- = (log A log B)  
è ø  
B
1 Connect the Light Source Output to the Monochromator Input using the short  
62.5/125 µm fiber. The standard connector interface is FC/PC.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Averaging Traces  
Trace averaging improves your measurement repeatability by smoothing out  
noise. For measurements involving slow polarization scrambling, using video  
filtering to improve repeatability will require a very narrow video bandwidth  
(less than 10 Hz). This would result in a long measurement time, where trace  
averaging would be faster. Refer to Averagingon page 3-14.  
1 From the front panel, press Traces > Averaging.  
2 Toggle to select the Averaging on or off.  
3 Select from the 10, 20, 50 or 100 softkeys or use the knob, step keys, or numeric  
entry pad to enter the desired average count.  
No t e  
For measurements with fast polarization scrambling, video filtering (adjusting  
video bandwidth) is generally faster than trace averaging for similar  
repeatability requirement.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Setting Video Bandwidth  
Video bandwidth filtering occurs after the detection of the light. In the auto  
coupled mode, the video bandwidth has an extremely wide range. This allows  
the instrument to avoid unnecessary filtering that would reduce the sweep  
speed more than required. Refer to Video BWon page 3-99.  
The instrument has two detection techniques: peak (auto mode) and sample  
(manual mode). Peak detection is beneficial for maintaining the fastest sweep  
times and displaying narrow aspect ratio signals. Sample detection is benefi-  
cial for obtaining best measurement accuracy and measuring low level signals.  
Peak detection finds and displays the maximum signal level present during  
each trace point interval. Peak detection is used if video filtering is not  
required to achieve the desired level of sensitivity. However, there is one  
exception: if an auto-coupled sweep time is limited by either maximum motor  
speed or a 50 ms auto-coupling limit, then sample detection is used with as  
narrow a digital video bandwidth as possible in order to achieve maximum  
sensitivity for the chosen sweep time. This exception only applies when both  
sweep time and video bandwidth are auto-coupled.  
Sample detection displays a filtered version of the sampled data at the end of  
each trace point interval. The filter function is varied with the video band-  
width function from 100 mHz to 3.0 kHz, or the bandwidth of the currently  
selected transimpedance amplifier, whichever is less. Increased filtering pro-  
vides greater sensitivity.  
The detection mode is automatically determined by the instrument. You can  
adjust the settings of video bandwidth, sensitivity, or sweep time to obtain the  
desired detection mode. Sample detection can be forced at any time by put-  
ting video bandwidth in manual. Peak detection can usually be obtained by  
placing sensitivity and video bandwidth in auto.  
The following functions affect video bandwidth:  
changing the sensitivity value  
changing the reference level  
turning auto ranging on or off  
The range of video bandwidths available in auto mode is much greater than  
can be set manually from the front panel. A lower video bandwidth value  
requires a longer sweep time. Because of the interdependence between the  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
video bandwidth and sensitivity, it is recommended that either the sensitivity  
or the video bandwidth be changed, whichever is the most important to the  
measurement task being performed.  
To reduce noise, you can select a narrower video bandwidth to improve  
repeatability and sensitivity or select a wider video bandwidth to shorten over-  
all measurement time. This selection allows the choice between repeatability  
and measurement time based on your measurement requirements. The nar-  
rower the video bandwidth, the longer the sweep time.  
1 From the front panel, press Bandwidth/Sweep > Video BW.  
2 Toggle to select the video bandwidth automatically or manually.  
3 Use the knob, step keys, or numeric entry pad to enter the desired value.  
No t e  
For measurements with slow polarization scrambling, use trace averaging to  
improve measurement repeatability. Trace averaging is faster than video  
filtering for the slow polarization scrambling application.  
Using Span to Zoom In  
To see a more detailed view of the devices response, decrease the wavelength  
span to expand the trace. This will enable you to precisely focus in on the  
desired measurement area. Refer to Spanon page 3-86.  
Press Wavelengt h > Spa n and reduce the span by entering the value of 2  
nm.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Setting the Sensitivity  
Setting sensitivity requests the lowest amplitude signal that can be measured  
relative to the highest amplitude signal displayed. It is defined as the signal  
that is six times the RMS noise. The minimum setting is 100 dB. An error will  
be reported for values outside of this range and the sensitivity will round to  
the nearest valid sensitivity. Refer to Sensitivityon page 3-81.  
Manual allows manual input of sensitivities and enables auto gain ranging.  
The top of screenand the sensitivity setting determines the requested  
dynamic range. The system will sweep once per gain stage and may require up  
to three sweeps to achieve the requested dynamic range.  
Aut o automatically chooses a sensitivity and a single gain range based on top  
of screen. This will result in approximately 40 dB of dynamic range.  
The sweep time that is displayed in the lower portion of the display is the time  
for the OSA to sweep over one gain stage. The OSA may take up to three  
sweeps in three different gain stages to make the measurement. This depends  
on the settings for sensitivity, reference level, auto range and also the particu-  
lar device being measured. The final data trace is a blended composite of each  
trace taken in the different gain stages.  
An increase in sensitivity may also require a narrower video bandwidth, which  
will slow the sweep speed. Normally, the optical spectrum analyzer selects the  
greatest sensitivity possible that does not require amplification changes dur-  
ing the sweep. If you manually increase the sensitivity level, the sweep pauses  
to allow this change in gain.  
The settings for sensitivity, video bandwidth and sweep time interact. If the  
sensitivity is set to manual, the video bandwidth and sweep time may be  
forced to Auto mode. If the video bandwidth is set to manual, the sensitivity  
and sweep time may be forced to Auto. If the sweep speed is set to manual  
and is set too fast, the over sweep indicator will come on in the display area.  
Since these settings interact, it is recommended that only one of the settings  
be changed, whichever setting is most important to the measurement task  
being performed.  
Press Amplitude, Sensitivity, toggle to manual, and enter a value.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Triggering a measurement synchronizes the start of the sweep to an internally  
generated trigger signal. Internal triggering ensures continuously triggered  
sweeps with the shortest delay between sweeps. Refer to Trigger Mode,  
Internalon page 3-96.  
In some measurements, the spectrum at a particular time within the modula-  
tion period is more important than the average spectrum. Gated triggering can  
be used to synchronize the data acquisition portion of the OSA to a gating trig-  
ger connected to the rear-panel EXT TRIG IN connector. Gated triggering  
requires a TTL-compatible signal with a minimum of 0 Vdc and a maximum of  
+5 V.  
Gated triggering ignores the spectrum when the trigger input is low. It usually  
is used in conjunction with the Max Hold function during several sweeps.  
Gated triggering is used to select data samples containing valid information.  
When the gating signal is high, the data sample is accepted. When the gating  
signal is low, the data sample is replaced by a data point with a value of  
200 dBm. Processing continues according to the functions selected, such as,  
video bandwidth, max hold, and so forth.  
If the low level exists for longer that the time needed for the grating to move  
from one trace point to the next, then the trace will have gaps. There are  
two ways to eliminate the gaps. You can increase the sweep time to at least:  
(1.22 times the product trace length) × (the longest low levelperiod)  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
The display will have at least one data sample marked as valid (high level) per  
trace point. Or else you can use the Max Hold function to complete a trace  
over several sweeps. Multiple sweeps fill the gaps because the high and low  
levels of the gating signal occur independent of the grating position.  
Gated triggering has no time limit for the high or low level. It can be used to  
characterize pulses as narrow as a few microseconds, or to obtain a spectrum  
whose timing exceeds the maximum 6.5 ms delay of the ADC trigger mode.  
1 On the front panel press Bandwidth > Sweep > More BW Sweep > Functions >  
Trigger Mode.  
2 Select from int, gated, and ext.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Moving the Active Function Area  
The active function area on the display can be moved to eight different loca-  
tions. This allows you to place the active area in a location that will not inter-  
fere with the trace information. Refer to Active Function Area Assiston  
page 3-2.  
1 Press the front-panel Syst em key.  
2 Press the Move Act ive Area softkey. Each press of the softkey moves the  
active function area to one of eight onscreen locations.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Setting Up Measurements  
Indicating an Update is Needed  
This feature alerts you to take a sweep after changing any sweep related  
parameters when the analyzer is not in sweep mode. For example, if you  
change the resolution bandwidth, the new resolution bandwidth is displayed  
on the bottom of the screen, but the trace data displayed on the screen used  
the previous resolution bandwidth value.  
Changing the following sweep parameters will set the Update Needed Indica-  
tor to on:  
start wavelength  
stop wavelength  
sensitivity auto/manual  
auto range enable/disable  
sensitivity  
video bandwidth auto/manual  
resolution bandwidth  
video bandwidth  
gated sweep enable/disable  
sweep continuous/single  
sweep time auto/manual  
sweep time  
sweep trace length  
reference level  
dB per division  
reference level position  
Y scale linear/log mode  
amplitude correction enable/disable  
current active ampcorr correction set  
ampcor interpolation method  
vacuum or air  
wavelength offset  
number of averages for trace averaging  
The Update Needed Indicator, *, is displayed in the upper right hand corner  
of the graticule. After a sweep is taken, the Update Needed Indicator will be  
set to off.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements  
Environmental variations such as air pressure, temperature, and humidity can  
affect the index of refraction of air in the monochromator of the optical spec-  
trum analyzer (OSA). This section discusses calibration methods that you can  
use to improve the wavelength accuracy in the Agilent 8614X OSAs. Refer to  
Calibrationon page 3-17 and to Calibrator Multi-Pt Alignon page 3-18.  
No t e  
Many aspects of remotely programming the optical spectrum analyzers are discussed  
in Product Note 86140-2R, Wavelength Calibration for the 86140X Series Optical  
Spectrum Analyzers (Literature part number 5980-0043E).  
Overview  
Wavelength calibration routines improve wavelength accuracy by determining  
errors and correcting them with offsets, using linear interpolation when neces-  
sary. For maximum wavelength accuracy, calibration points spaced a maxi-  
mum of 10 nm apart are recommended.  
You can perform a wavelength calibration by using one of the following meth-  
ods:  
Manual Method using Internal Calibrator  
Remote Method using Internal Calibrator  
Manual Method using an External Single Wavelength Source  
Remote Method using an External Single Wavelength Source  
External Multipoint Wavelength Calibration  
These calibration routines should only be performed after the instruments  
temperature has been stabilized by a minimum of 1 hour of continuous opera-  
tion.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Instrument  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements  
Internal Wavelength Calibration  
The optional internal calibrator (1513 to 1540 nm) provides a convenient  
method for increasing wavelength accuracy when used with an internal  
Enhanced Wavelength Calibration (EWC) process. The wavelength accuracy  
of the OSA will be ±0.2 nm over the full wavelength range of the instrument,  
with ±10 pm over 1480 to 1570 nm and ±25 pm accuracy over 1570 to 1620  
nm.  
The EWC range can be selected for either the fullOSA range of 605 nm to  
1670 nm, or the telecomrange of 1270 to 1670 nm, a smaller span more rele-  
vant to telecommunications. EWC must be enabled for the wavelength accu-  
racy specifications to apply in the range selected. Setting the range to FULL  
will require a longer calibration time for an internal calibration, but will pro-  
vide enhanced wavelength accuracy over the full range.  
Ma nua l method using the inter na l ca libr a tor  
1 Access the EWC setup panel:  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
> More Adv Service Menu > Enhanced Wvl Cal Setup  
2 Enable the function, if necessary, and select the desired calibration range.  
3 Clean all connectors and connect the internal calibrator to the OSA input.  
4 Access the Wavelength Calibration setup panel:  
System >Calibration > Wavelength Cal Setup  
5 Set the signal source to Calibrator.  
6 Press Perform Calibration.  
Remote method using the inter na l ca libr a tor  
CALibration:WAVelength:EWC:FUNCtion ON !Enable enhanced wavelength  
calibration.  
CALibration:WAVelength:EWC:RANGe TELE !Select telecom (1270-1670) nm range  
for enhanced wavelength calibration.  
CALibration:WAVelength:INTernal:NORMal  
!Perform internal wavelength  
calibration.  
!The internal calibrator must be  
connected before sending this  
command.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements  
External Single Wavelength Calibration  
Using an external single-point calibration source allows the calibration to be  
done at a specific wavelength. This single wavelength user calibration can be  
repeated as often as necessary to correct for environmental variations and  
existing multipoint wavelength offsets will be adjusted accordingly. After a  
single wavelength calibration, wavelength accuracy will be ±10 pm within 10  
nm of the reference signal.  
The Enhanced Wavelength Calibration (EWC) process can also be used to  
increase the accuracy of the single-point calibration.  
Ma nua l method using a n exter na l source  
1 Connect the external source to the OSA input.  
2 Auto align the OSA to the input signal.  
3 Access the Wavelength Calibration setup panel:  
System > Calibration > Wavelength Cal Setup  
4 Select Air or Vacuum reference for the signal source.  
5 Set the signal source to External.  
6 Select the desired Calibration Wavelength. This wavelength must be within  
±2.5 nm of the source wavelength.  
7 Select Perform Calibration.  
Remote method using a n exter na l source  
For a source with a single peak:  
CALibration:WAVelength:VALue <param>  
CALibration:WAVelength  
!Set calibration wavelength  
!Calibrate signal at wavelength  
For a source with multiple peaks:  
CALibration:WAVelength:VALue <param>  
!Set calibration wavelength  
!Set marker wavelength  
CALCulate:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X:WAVelength  
<param>  
CALibration:WAVelength:MARKer  
!Calibrate signal at marker  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements  
External Multipoint Wavelength Calibration  
An external multipoint wavelength calibration can be performed over any  
the OSA (600 nm to 1700 nm). Narrow measurement spans can be chosen to  
provide greater accuracy over a selected range. Calibrating the wavelength  
every 10 nm within the desired wavelength range is usually sufficient to  
improve wavelength accuracy. After a multipoint wavelength calibration,  
wavelength accuracy will be ±10 pm within 10 nm of each calibration wave-  
length. Refer to Calibrator Multi-Pt Alignon page 3-18.  
No t e  
For a full explanation of external multipoint wavelength calibration, along with a  
sample program to perform the calibration, refer to Product Note 86140-2,  
Wavelength Calibration for the 86140X Series Optical Spectrum Analyzers  
(Literature part number 5980-0043E).  
The following steps outline one method for an external multipoint wavelength  
calibration routine. This assumes a program executed on a external PC con-  
troller. The steps outlined are those written in the program.  
1 A signal is sent from a tunable laser source into a multi-wavelength meter and  
the OSA simultaneously.  
2 The wavelength of the input signal is measured on both instruments.  
3 The two measured values are compared.  
4 Taking the multi-wavelength meter readings as actual, the software calculates  
the error offsets at each wavelength using the equation:  
WL Error = (OSA indicated WL) (multi-wavelength meter actual WL)  
5 The previous steps are repeated over the entire wavelength range.  
6 The data is averaged over narrow wavelength spans to provide a suitable  
correction for each span. The example below demonstrates this technique.  
Once the instrument is calibrated, the new wavelength accuracy can be main-  
tained for many hours without recalibration, assuming a stable temperature  
environment.  
Tip  
If the OSA is turned off, the multipoint data will be retained at the next power-  
on, but the internal thermal shift can introduce inaccuracies to the calibration  
data. To help compensate for this, a single point calibration using the Offset  
feature in the Wavelength Calibration Setup panel can be used to adjust the  
multipoint data. Access this feature by selecting System > Calibration >  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Calibrating Wavelength Measurements  
Wavelength Cal Setup and choosing the Offset option before running the single  
point calibration. To insure this offset process has provided sufficient accuracy,  
the wavelength readings of the multi-wavelength meter and the OSA should be  
compared to verify the wavelength accuracy and determine if a full multipoint  
wavelength recalibration is necessary.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
The functions and methods available for saving, recalling, and managing files  
that contain measurement setups and results are as follows:  
Adding a Title to the Display  
Backing Up or Restoring the Internal Memory  
Saving Measurement Trace Data  
Recalling Measurement Trace Data  
Adding a Title to the Display  
Refer to Title (Display Setup Panel)on page 3-92 and to Date/Time (Dis-  
play Setup Panel)on page 3-20.  
1 Press the front-panel Syst em key.  
2 Press the Set Tit le.... softkey. The Title Setup panel appears.  
The Title Setup panel  
3 To view the title on the display, press More System Funct ions >Display  
Setup and check the Title On box.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
Backing Up or Restoring the Internal Memory  
1 Press the front-panel Save/Recall key.  
2 Press the Backup/Rest ore Menu.... softkey.  
No t e  
The auto span value will not be saved with the measurement. Refer to Backup  
Internal Memoryon page 3-15.  
Soft key Panel  
Select ions  
Ba ckup Inter na l Memor y  
a The analyzer Backup Utility screen appears asking you to insert a formatted  
floppy disk in the external drive. The disk will not be viewable on a PC and  
no trace or measurement files can be saved onto the disk until it is reformat-  
ted.  
b The Backup Internal Memory function overwrites the floppy disk with a new  
image. Any existing files or catalogs on the floppy disk will be destroyed. Any  
successive backup operations will overwrite the previous backup informa-  
tion, so only the latest backup information can be recovered through the Re-  
store Internal Memory operation.  
Restore Inter na l Memory  
The analyzer Restore Utility screen appears. This operation will remove all  
files from internal memory and replace them with files from backup floppy  
disks.  
Saving Measurement and Trace Data  
You can save measurement and trace data using the following methods:  
Fast Measurement Save Mode  
Save Setup Panel Mode  
Sa ving Da ta in Fa st Mea s Sa ve Mode  
1 Press the front-panel Save/Recall key.  
2 Press the Fast Meas SAVE softkey.  
3 The instrument saves the current measurement state to internal memory as  
FASTSAVE.dat. Only one FASTSAVE.dat file exists, so performing a Fast Meas  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
Save will overwrite any currently existing Fast Save file.  
No t e  
The auto span value will not be saved with the measurement.  
Sa ving Mea surement a nd Tra ce Da ta  
1 Press the front-panel Save/Recall key.  
2 Press the Save Menu.... softkey.  
3 The Save Setup panel opens. Refer to Adjusting Setup Conditionson page 2-3  
for information on changing and selecting items in the setup panel.  
The Save Setup panel  
No t e  
The auto span value will not be saved with the measurement.  
Save Set up Panel Sa ve: Mea surement  
Select ions Saves the measurement data in a binary format (.dat file). This includes the  
traces and all measurement conditions. The dat file format can only be read by  
the analyzer. You will not be able to view this file on your PC. When the file is  
recalled, the instrument state will be set to the same state as when the file was  
saved.  
Sa ve: Tra ce(s) Only  
The Trace(s) Only files are saved in comma separated variable (.csv) format  
and are auto named starting with TR_00000.csv. State files are auto named  
starting with ST_00000.csv.  
When the Trace(s) Only file is recalled, the trace data will be displayed u n der  
the current instrument settings.To view the instrument settings, press Sys-  
tem > More System Functions > State Info.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
Sa ve Tra ces  
Selects the traces to be saved.  
Sa ve Gr a phics  
Allows you to save graphic data in one of two formats. These selections are  
valid only when saving to the floppy drive.  
CGM ( Computer Graphics Metafile format) is a vector graphics format that  
describes pictures and graphical elements in geometric terms. The file is  
saved with .cgm extension.  
GIF ( Graphics Interchange Format) is a cross-platform graphic standard.  
GIF formats are commonly used on many different platforms and readable  
by many different kinds of software. The file is saved with .gif extension. GIF  
supports up to 8-bit color (256 colors).  
Sa ve to  
Allows you to choose between saving data to a floppy disk or to internal mem-  
ory.  
File Na me  
Selects manual or automatic mode for choosing a file name.  
4 If you have chosen Auto to select the file name, press the Auto Save softkey.  
The analyzer will generate a filename and save the file.  
5 If you have chosen Manual to select the file name, press the Choose File t o  
Save softkey. The Filename Menu setup panel opens.  
The Filename Menu setup panel  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
E nter ing a Filena me Using the Ar r ow Keys  
Use the front-panel step keys (Ý and ß) and the arrow softkeys (and )  
to highlight each letter of the filename.  
When the desired letter or function is selected, press the Select softkey.  
Select the BackSpace function to delete individual letters.  
Select the Clear Line function to delete the entire filename.  
When you finish entering the filename, press the SAVE FILE softkey.  
E nter ing a Filena me using a n E xter na l Keyboa rd  
There must be a PS-2 keyboard connected to the analyzer prior to bootup.  
Press [TAB] on the keyboard to highlight the entry field.  
Enter the filename using the keyboard.  
When you finish entering the filename, press the SAVE FILE softkey.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
Recalling Measurement and Trace Data  
You can recall measurement and trace data using the following methods:  
Fast Measurement Recall Mode  
Recall Setup Panel Mode  
Refer to Recall (Recall Setup Panel)on page 3-67.  
Reca lling Da ta in Fa st Mea s Reca ll Mode  
1 Press the front-panel Save/Recall key.  
2 Press the Fast Meas RECALL softkey.  
3 The instrument recalls the measurement state previously saved as  
FASTSAVE.dat by the Fast Meas Save function.  
No t e  
No t e  
The auto span value will not be saved with the measurement.  
Reca lling Mea surement a nd Tra ce Da ta  
To insure accurate measurements, a wavelength calibration should be  
performed each time measurement data is recalled from memory.  
1 Press the front-panel Save/Recall key.  
2 Press the Recall Menu.... softkey.  
3 The Recall Setup panel opens.  
The Recall Menu setup panel  
No t e  
The auto span value will not be saved with the measurement.  
Recall Setup Panel Reca ll  
Select ions Selects whether a measurement or trace will be recalled.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
Reca ll Fr om  
Selects whether to recall from a floppy disk or from internal memory.  
4 When you are satisfied with your selections, press the Choose File t o Recall  
softkey. The Catalog setup panel opens.  
The Catalog setup panel  
5 Use the arrow keys or Prev File, Next File softkeys to highlight the desired  
file. Press RECALL FILE to load the selected file.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Saving, Recalling, and Managing Files  
File Sharing and Printing over a Network  
This function uses the LAN to print to network printers and store, recall or  
delete data on remote hard drives. The data can then to be accessed and  
shared among the users and printed on designated printers.  
work and enter the user share identity/user profile information for remote  
shares. The softkeys for file and printer share will then become available for  
selection.  
Crea te a file or print sha re.  
1 Configure the network. Refer to Setting Up the OSA for Remote Operationon  
page 4-4 for instructions on how to configure the network.  
2 From the front panel, press System > More System Funct ions > GPIB &  
Net work Set up > User Share Identity.  
3 Enter the User Name, Password, and Workgroup. Use the keyboard to enter the  
information or press Edit Field to access the User Workgroup Setup panel then  
close the panel.  
4 From the Network Setup, press File Share and enter the Share Path and  
optional IP address. The format of the share path is \\server\share name.”  
Please note that you cannot specify directories within the share. Up to four  
remote file shares are available.  
5 Press Printer Shares and enter the share path and optional IP address. Use the  
keyboard to enter the information or press Edit Field to access the User  
Workgroup Setup panel. Up to four remote printer shares are available.  
6 To activate the printer share, press Syst em > Print er Set up and select the  
configured share. To activate the file share, press Save/Recall then either  
Save, Recall or Delete and select the configured share. Note if you have not  
configured the share the Network File Share buttons will not be active.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Analyzing Measurement Data  
Analyzing Measurement Data  
This section provides advice and information on the following analyzer func-  
tions that allow you to analyze the measured amplitude wavelength data.  
Tips for Using Traces and Markers  
Measuring the Delta between Traces  
Using Trace Math to Measure Wavelength Drift  
The analyzer provides the ability to display up to six traces with up to four  
markers. Knowing a few tips makes trace and marker manipulation much eas-  
ier. Refer to Traceson page 3-95, Marker BWon page 3-37, Marker Search  
Menuon page 3-38, Marker Setupon page 3-39, and More Marker Func-  
tionson page 3-45.  
Markers are always placed on the currently selected active trace. Therefore,  
use the Active Trace function to activate the desired trace, then select an active  
marker to be placed on that trace.  
When multiple markers are currently used on multiple traces, the Marker Sta-  
tus area (located at the top of the display) makes it easy to identify the state of  
each marker.  
Information provided for each marker includes:  
Wavelength  
Amplitude  
The trace associated with the marker.  
For example, if marker 1 is on Trace A then the annotation will show  
Mkr 1 (A).  
In addition, if there are two markers on, then the delta of the wavelength and  
amplitude for the two different markers is also displayed. For example, Mkr  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the Instrument  
Analyzing Measurement Data  
(2-1) 0.206 nm, -0.002 dB.  
The color of the annotation denotes different characteristics of the markers:  
White annotation denotes the status of the currently active marker.  
Green annotation denotes the status of all currently used markers.  
Red annotation denotes that some type of an error occurred with the marker  
measurement.  
Moving the Active Marker from One Trace to Another  
The following procedure shows you how to move the active marker (marker 1)  
from Trace A to Trace B.  
1 From the front panel, press Markers > Active Trace > TrB to make Trace B  
the active trace.  
2 Press Active Marker > Mkr 1.  
Measuring the Difference between Traces  
The following procedure shows you how to find the amplitude and wavelength  
difference between the maximum peaks of two different traces. Refer to Nor-  
mal/Delta Marker Interpolation (Marker Setup Panel)on page 3-50.  
1 From the front panel, press Markers > Active Trace and select the first trace  
to place a marker.  
2 Press Active Marker > Mkr 1 > Peak Search to place the marker on the  
highest peak of the active trace.  
3 Press Active Trace and select the second trace to place a marker.  
4 Press Active Marker > Mkr 2 > Peak Search to place the marker on the  
highest peak of the second trace.  
5 View the results of the measurement from the marker annotation at the top of  
the display.  
The wavelength and amplitude of each trace marker is shown, as well as the  
amplitude and wavelength difference of the peaks of the two traces.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Instrument  
Analyzing Measurement Data  
Using Trace Math to Measure Wavelength Drift  
1 From the front panel, press Traces > Act ive Trace > TrA.  
2 Press Single Sweep, Bandwidth Sweep, Single Sweep to update Trace A  
then press Traces, Updat e A off.  
3 Press Active Trace > TrB.  
4 Press Sweep > Repeat Sweep On to continuously update the measured  
response on Trace B.  
5 Press Traces > Trace Math, Default Mat h Trace C > Log Math C = A – B.  
You can now monitor the wavelength drift of your device over time.  
Also Refer to Log Math C=ABon page 3-35, Log Math C=A+Bon  
page 3-35, and Log Math F=CDon page 3-36.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
This section discusses the following analyzer modes that you can use in spe-  
cific measurement applications.  
Filter Mode (For Agilent 86144B/86146B only)  
Filter Mode (For Agilent 86141B only)  
Time Resolved Chirp  
Filter Mode  
For Agilent 86144B/86146B only  
The Agilent 86144B and 86146B filter mode allows a single channel from a  
dense wavelength division multiplex (DWDM) signal to be isolated and routed  
to another measurement instrument. The filter mode capability is built-in to  
internal applications to allow for fast and easy measurements. The filtering is  
accurate and flexible. It has low polarization dependent loss (PDL), adjustable  
filter bandwidth, and a wide tuning range.  
1 Switch to filter mode by pressing Appl > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode.  
2 Select a filter bandwidth in the BW/sweep > Res BW menu.  
3 Select an active tuning marker and tune it to a wavelength position.  
All other markers stay on. In the filter mode, the analyzer acts as a fixed-  
tuned, variable wavelength, variable bandwidth, bandpass filter. It filters the  
input light at a specified wavelength. The filtered light is available at the front-  
panel monochromator output connector. One application of the filter mode is  
the filtering (selecting) of one particular mode of a laser source. Refer to Fil-  
ter Modeon page 3-29, Filter Mode Instruction Panelson page 3-29, and  
Filter Marker Tuneon page 3-28.  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
When the analyzer enters the filter mode, the sweep stops with the analyzer  
filter tuned to the center wavelength. (If a marker is on, the analyzer filter is  
tuned to the marker wavelength.) The last trace remains displayed to show  
the input spectrum before the filtering. A marker shows the wavelength of the  
preselection. You can change the filtered output (preselection) wavelength by  
adjusting the markers position, then connecting the monochromator output  
to another instrument. If the input spectrum changes, reconnect the mono-  
chromator output, then press the Take Sweep softkey to capture a new sweep.  
The single mode filter can be used in conjunction with the Agilent 86130A bit-  
alyzer error performance analyzer and/or the Agilent 86100A infinium digital  
communication analyzer. Time resolve chirp (TRC) measurements use the  
Agilent 86146B Option TRC and the Agilent 86100A digital communication  
analyzer.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
Table 2-6. Differences Between Agilent 86141B and 86144B/86146B  
86141B Unique Operation (Internal 50 µm Fiber Switch)  
Filter mode initialization:  
Previous settings are lost  
A single sweep is taken  
Markers used:  
The marker is set to the reference level  
Functions limited to:  
Taking a single sweep  
Changing resolution bandwidth  
Resolution bandwidth is Marker 1  
Filter mode functions available:  
Exit recalls the last selected state parameters prior to entering filter mode  
86144B/86146B Unique Operation (External 9 µm Fiber Connection)  
Filter mode initialization:  
No default settings  
Markers used:  
Filter marker is the normal noise marker  
OSNR marker is the center marker  
Bandwidth marker is the center wavelength marker  
Functions limited to:  
Fiber selection  
Applications  
Calibration  
ADC  
Filter mode functions available:  
Transfer and restore state file in filter mode  
Save in filter mode  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
Accessing the filter mode (for 86144B/86146B only)  
No t e  
Filter mode will not function in zero span. The filter mode selection will be  
shaded out. The current state before entering filter mode will not be saved. A  
sweep will not be taken. The reference level will not change.  
1 Connect the light source to the optical spectrum analyzers front panel  
monochromator input connector.  
2 Connect the monochromator output to the photodetector input.  
3 Press Appls > Measurement Modes > Filt er Mode. Follow the external  
path align setup instructions and select either the Switch Path Auto Align Now  
or Switch Path No Auto Align.  
Select the Switch Pat h Auto Align Now to perform an automatic align-  
ment of the external path.  
Select Swit ch Path No Aut o Align if you do not have the monochromator  
output connected to the photodiode input, or to preserve previous align da-  
ta.  
Switch Path Auto Align Now switches to the 9 µm filter mode path and  
performs an Auto Align. This aligns the output of the monochromator with the  
photodetector input for improved amplitude accuracy. The automatic align-  
ment procedure should be performed whenever the instrument has been:  
moved  
subjected to large temperature changes  
turned off, then on, and warmed up for an hour  
The automatic alignment requires the connection of an external light source.  
This can be a broadband or narrowband source. If there is insufficient signal  
power, the automatic alignment will not be performed and an error message  
will be reported.  
The Auto Align function saves and restores the current instrument state. This  
allows the auto align to be used in the middle of a measurement routine.  
If markers are turned on, auto align attempts to do the automatic alignment at  
the wavelength of the active marker.  
No t e  
Auto Align Now will overwrite any previous align data.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
The data returned by the alignment is stored for both the external (9 µm) and  
the internal (50 µm) path. With the data stored for both paths, the alignment  
for the internal path is improved due to the increased resolution bandwidth of  
the external path. Once the align is complete or if you select No Auto Align,  
the instrument will be ready to detect data through the external path.  
4 After the routine has finished, check that the display shows the wavelength  
range of interest of the external path. Adjust if necessary.  
5 Press Res BW. Use the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to enter the desired  
amount of resolution bandwidth filtering.  
The 9 µm optical path for filter mode uses the 0.04 nm resolution bandwidth.  
The resolution bandwidths include 0.04 µm, 0.05 µm, 0.07 µm, 0.1µm, 0.2 µm,  
0.3 µm, 0.5 µm, 1 µm, 2 µm, 5 µm, and 10 µm.  
6 Press Take Sweep to update the display to show the results of the new  
resolution bandwidth filtering.  
The light is output from the optical spectrum analyzers front panel monochro-  
mator output connector. This light is filtered (by the resolution bandwidth)  
and attenuated (by the monochromator loss) light that is input to the front  
panel optical input connector.  
7 Press Opt ical Filt er Marker Tune. Turn the front panel knob or press the  
step keys to tune the preselector to any displayed wavelength.  
8 Connect the monochromator output to an instrument.  
9 If the input light changes, or if you change the span of the optical spectrum  
analyzer, reconnect the monochromator output to the photodetector input,  
and press Take Sweep to update the displayed trace with valid waveform data.  
10 Press Exit Filt er Mode to return to normal optical spectrum analyzer  
operation.  
The filter mode Save/Recall function for the Agilent 86144B/86146B will work  
only between these two models.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
No t e  
If the file saved in filter mode is recalled into an instrument with firmware  
revision B.04.02, a critical error occurs, indicating a grating positioning failure.  
Restart the instrument to clear the error and then continue making  
measurements.  
Filter Mode  
For Agilent 86141B only  
In the filter or instrument mode, the analyzer acts as a fixed-tuned, variable  
wavelength, variable bandwidth, bandpass filter. It filters the input light at a  
specified wavelength. The filtered light is available at the front-panel mono-  
chromator output connector. Adjust the analyzers resolution bandwidth to  
change the amount of filtering. (Any of the resolution bandwidths may be cho-  
sen.) One application of the preselector mode is the filtering (that is, select-  
ing) of one particular mode of a laser source.  
When the preselector mode is entered, the sweep stops with the analyzer fix-  
tuned at the center wavelength. (If a marker is on, the analyzer is fix-tuned at  
the marker wavelength.) The last trace remains displayed to show the input  
spectrum before the filtering. A marker shows the wavelength of the preselec-  
tion. You can change the filtered output (preselection) wavelength by adjust-  
ing the markers position. If the input spectrum changes, a softkey, Take  
Sweep, is provided for capturing a new sweep.  
Pr eselecting a light source (for 86141B)  
1 Connect the light source to the optical spectrum analyzers front panel  
monochromator input connector.  
2 Press Aut o Meas. After the routine has finished, check that the display shows  
the wavelength range of interest. Adjust if necessary.  
3 Press Applications > Measurement Modes > Filt er Mode > Res BW. Use  
the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to enter the desired amount of  
resolution bandwidth filtering.  
4 Press Take Sweep (Applications > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Take  
Sweep) to update the display to show the results of the new resolution  
bandwidth filtering.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
The light is output from the optical spectrum analyzers front panel monochro-  
mator output connector. This light is a filtered (by the resolution bandwidth)  
and attenuated (by the monochromator loss) light input to the front panel  
monochromator input connector.  
5 Press Marker Tune (Applications > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode >  
Marker Tune). Turn the front panel knob to tune the preselector to any  
displayed wavelength.  
6 If the input light changes, or if you change the span of the optical spectrum  
analyzer, press Take Sweep to update the displayed trace with valid waveform  
data.  
7 Press Previous Menu to return to normal optical spectrum analyzer  
operation.  
To use a single mode output ca ble  
This procedure ensures the best launching of the output light from the 50 µm  
monochromator output connector into a 9 µm fiber optic cable.  
1 Connect the light source to the optical spectrum analyzers front panel  
monochromator input connector. Use a 9 µm fiber optic cable.  
2 Connect a 9 µm fiber optic cable between the front panel monochromator  
output and photodetector input connectors.  
3 Press Auto Meas. After the routine has ended, check that the display shows the  
wavelength range of interest. Adjust if necessary. The light response to be  
preselected should be displayed on the screen.  
4 Press Applications > Measurement Modes >  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
Time Resolved Chirp  
For Agilent 86146B option TRC only  
The Agilent 86146B, with the filter mode capability, will measure side mode  
suppression ratio (SMSR), wavelength, and power. With the addition of an  
Agilent 86100 Infinium Digital Communications Analyzer (DCA), dedicated  
software (86146B Option TRL), and a personal computer, time resolved chirp  
(TRC) of a modulated laser can be calculated.  
TRC provides frequency (or wavelength) vs time information about a modu-  
lated lightwave signal. Also called dynamic chirp, the TRC graph provides use-  
ful information on the ability of a modulated signal to propagate over long  
distances in optical fiber. In dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)  
systems, excessive chirp also can cause inter-channel interference. The two  
significant factors of chirp are:  
dispersion which is a function of the transmission links length and fiber type  
cross talk caused by chirp due to closely spaced channels  
A measurement could show the modulated signal (square wave) and the  
chirp. The chirp fluctuates with time and the frequency change, seen at the  
falling and rising edge of the time domain. The time resolved chirp solution  
measures:  
intensity versus time  
frequency versus time  
calculates the alpha factor  
The alpha factor is also referred to as linewidth enhancement factor. One defi-  
nition of α is:  
α= 2P(f) ⁄ (p)  
During initialization, the instrument does an auto peak, gathers information  
about the peaks, and tunes the filter marker. The unmodulated data in shown  
in the square wave pattern and the chirp is the frequency which runs through  
the square wave pattern.  
To smooth the chirp signal, increase the averages taken which will decrease  
the noise found on the signal. Increasing the number of averages and using the  
longer patterns will increase the measurement processing time. To shorten  
the measurement processing time, either increase the power or decrease the  
number of averages. See the TRC Option Users Guide for more details.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Instrument  
Analyzer Operating Modes  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Function Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Function Reference  
Function Reference  
This chapter is an alphabetical reference of front panel keys, softkeys, and  
setup panel parameters. It is designed for quick information access. For exam-  
ple, during an operation you may find a key whose function is unfamiliar to  
you. Note the key name and look the key up in this chapter.  
Active Function Area Assist  
Sets the active function area to the first or top softkey function. When this  
function is on, the active area is automatically set. For example, when you  
press the front-panel Wavelength key, the active function area assist will set  
the active function to the Center WL. You can immediately enter the desired  
center wavelength without pressing the Center WL softkey. If this function is  
off, the active dialog box will not appear on the display. To access the individ-  
ual dialog box, press the desired softkey function.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup  
Move Active Area  
Related Functions  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Active Marker  
Active Marker  
Accesses the menu that allows you to select an active marker. Selecting a  
trace. Up to four markers can be simultaneously displayed. If multiple markers  
are displayed, the active marker appears as a white diamond and the other  
markers appear as green diamonds. The Mkr notation on top of the graticule  
area indicates the trace where the marker is located. For example, Marker 2  
on trace B would read Mkr 2(B).  
See Tips for Using Traces and Markerson page 2-27, and Measuring the Dif-  
ference between Traceson page 2-28.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Active Marker  
Related Functions  
Active Trace, Peak Search, Pit Search, Marker to Center, Marker to Refer-  
ence Level  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:STATe  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:AOFF  
Accesses the menu that allows you to select an active trace for viewing, updat-  
ing, or storing. The trace must be active before you can put a marker on it or  
make changes to it. There are six traces available.  
See Tips for Using Traces and Markerson page 2-27, and Measuring the Dif-  
ference between Traceson page 2-28.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Active Trace  
Markers > Active Trace  
Related Functions  
Trace Math, View (Trace), Update (Trace)  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:TRACe  
TRACe:FEED:INPute TRA,2  
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol:TRA, ALWays  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe TRA, ON  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Adv Service Functions  
Adv Service Functions  
Accesses the following functions:  
Grating Order  
More Adv Service Menu  
Wavelength Limit  
Zero Now  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
Advanced Line Mkr Functions  
Accesses the following functions:  
integrate limit  
search limit  
sweep limit  
trace integ  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu > Advanced Line  
Mkr Functions  
Agilent Logo (Display Setup Panel)  
Accesses the panel that allows you to turn the Agilent logo on or off. When  
this function is on, the Agilent logo appears on the displays upper, left corner  
of the graticule and on printouts.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup  
All Math Off  
Turns all the trace math functions off.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off > All Math Off  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
All Off  
All Off  
Turns all the active markers off.  
No t e  
If filter mode is on, this function is not available.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Active Marker > All Off  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:AOFF  
Commands  
Amplitude  
Accesses the menu of keys that allow you to control the instruments sensitiv-  
ity and amplitude scales. The function keys include:  
amplitude setup  
display mode  
peak to ref level  
reference level  
scale/div  
sensitivity  
trace integ  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Amplitude Setup  
Amplitude Setup  
Accesses the Amplitude Setup panel that allows you to specify amplitude  
related functions:  
amplitude correction mode  
amplitude correction sel  
amplitude units  
auto chop mode  
auto ranging  
auto zero  
power calibration  
reference level position  
user power cal date  
The Amplitude Setup panel  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
Amplitude Setup  
Setup Panel  
Select ions  
Reference Level Position  
The value selected for the Reference Level Position determines the position of  
the reference level on the graticule. Setting this value to zero divisions places  
the reference level on the very bottom of the grid. Setting the reference level  
to 10 divisions places the reference level at the top of the grid. Pressing the  
front-panel Preset key resets the reference level to 9.0 divisions.  
No t e  
When using the knob or step keys, the value will automatically change. When  
using the numeric entry pad, enter a terminator that is selected from the  
softkey panel.  
Amplitude Units  
Selecting Auto for amplitude units allows power to be shown in dBm when  
using the logarithmic scale, and in watts when using the linear scale. Selecting  
W forces the immediately displayed information to be in watts, regardless of  
the amplitude scaling.  
Auto Ra nging  
The Auto Range function allows the OSA to automatically change the gain of  
the transimpedance amplifier during a sweep. This allows measurements to be  
made at the largest dynamic range and at the fastest sweep speed.  
Pressing the front-panel Preset key turns Auto Ranging ON.  
No t e  
It is recommended that Auto Ranging always be turned on.  
Auto Zero  
Turns Auto Zero ON and OFF. Auto Zero ON enables the internal amplifiers to  
be zeroed between sweeps. Selecting OFF disables this feature. Pressing the  
front-panel Preset key resets this function to ON.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Amplitude Setup  
No t e  
Turning Auto Zero off allows the instrument to sweep faster, but results in less  
accuracy on low level signals. The optical spectrum analyzer performs a more  
complete zeroing when the instrument is first turned on. You can run this more  
complete routine anytime by pressing the Zero Now softkey.  
Auto Chop Mode  
(Not a va ila ble on 86144B/86146B models)  
Enables the optical spectrum analyzer chop mode. Chop mode increases  
dynamic range for long sweep times by subtracting ambient light. Subtracting  
the ambient light can improve sensitivity but slows down the sweep speed.  
Pressing the front-panel Preset key turns this function OFF.  
No t e  
Sweep times of 50 msec × the # of trace points, or longer, use a special chop”  
mode. Chop mode increases dynamic range, stabilizes measurements against  
drift, and reduces effects of stray light. This special chop mode is enabled by  
setting the Auto Chop mode to on.  
Power Ca libr a tion  
Power Calibration allows you to use amplitude correction factors either from  
the factory calibration or from the last successful user calibration. Pressing  
the front-panel Preset key resets this function to User. If a user calibration has  
not been performed, the factory calibration data is used.  
User Power Ca l Da te  
The User Power Cal Date displays the date of the last successful user-per-  
formed amplitude calibration.  
Amplitude Corr ection Sel  
Allows you to select a correction set to be applied to the measurement results.  
Only one set can be selected at a time. Refer to Amplitude Correction Remote  
Commandson page 5-16 for an overview of the amplitude correction remote  
commands.  
Amplitude Corr ection Mode  
Allows you to turn the AMPCOR ON or OFF.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Function Reference  
Amplitude Units (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
When AMPCOR is turned on, the correction points are applied across the  
active measurement range and added to all measurement results. Between  
points, the correction values are interpolated linearly or logarithmically. When  
measuring at wavelengths outside the first and last correction points, the first  
or last value (as appropriate) is used as the correction value.  
Whenever AMPCOR is active, the currently selected correction set is dis-  
played in the lower left corner of the screen. For example, if correction set  
number one is selected, A1is displayed. Refer to Amplitude Correction  
Remote Commandson page 5-16 for an overview of the amplitude correction  
remote commands.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Amplitude Setup...  
Reference Level, Sensitivity  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
(Amplitude Display Mode):DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe LINear  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe LOGarithmic  
(Amplitude Units):UNIT:POWer  
(Auto Zero):CALibration:ZERO  
(Reference Level Position):DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RPOSition  
Amplitude Units (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
Selects the amplitude scales units. Selecting Auto for amplitude units allows  
power to be shown in dB when using the logarithmic scale and in watts when  
using the linear scale. Selecting W forces the readout to be in watts, regardless  
of the amplitude scaling.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Amplitude Setup > Amplitude Units  
Display Mode, Trace Marker, Scale/Div  
UNIT:POWer  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Auto Align  
Auto Align  
Pressing the auto align button on the front panel of the instrument performs  
an automatic alignment of the instrument using the largest signal found in a  
full span sweep. This aligns the output of the monochromator with the photo-  
detector for improved amplitude accuracy. To ensure maximum amplitude  
accuracy and stability, connect an input signal to the instrument, mark the  
peak of the signal, and then press Auto Align. This starts an automatic align-  
ment procedure that should be performed whenever the instrument has been:  
moved  
subjected to a 2° temperature change  
restarted and warmed up at the start of each day  
The automatic alignment requires the connection of an external, broadband or  
narrowband, light source. If there is insufficient signal power, the automatic  
alignment will not be performed and an error message will be reported.  
The auto align function saves and restores the current instrument state. This  
allows the auto align function to be used in the middle of a measurement rou-  
tine.  
If markers are turned on, the auto align function attempts to do the automatic  
alignment at the wavelength of the active marker. If the instrument is in zero  
span, the alignment is performed at the center wavelength.  
Key Pat h  
Auto Align  
Related Functions  
Auto Meas  
Auto Align & Add to Trajectory  
Calibrator Multi-Pt Align  
User Source Multi-Pt Align  
Remot e  
CALibration:ALIGn  
Commands  
CALibration:ALIGn:MARKer[1|2|3|4]  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Auto Align & Add to Trajectory  
Auto Align & Add to Trajectory  
Allows alignment at several wavelengths, ensuring amplitude accuracy of your  
measurements. Before initiating the alignment, connect a broadband light  
source to the front-panel input connector. (You may add and/or update the  
existing points in the trajectory table.) Press Auto Align Preset to clear the  
table.  
Turn on an active marker and manually place the marker at the desired wave-  
length. If an active marker is not turned on, the instrument will automatically  
turn on an active marker and auto align at the largest input signal. The mini-  
mum recommended spacing between points is 5 nm for the external, single  
mode fiber (Agilent 86144B/86146B only) and 50 nm for the internal, multi-  
mode fiber. The span must be >3 nm for the single mode fiber and >25 nm for  
the multi-mode fiber.  
No t e  
Error 5001, Auto align cannot find input signal, will occur if a broadband light  
source is not connected to the front-panel input connector.  
Error 5070, Trajectory Add Failed, will occur if the trajectory table is full or the  
computed trajectory table is invalid.  
Key Pat h  
Systems > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
>More Adv Service Menu > Multi-Point Align > Auto Align & Add to Trajec-  
tory  
Related Functions  
Auto Align Preset  
Calibrator Multi-Pt Align  
User Source Mutli-Pt Align  
Remot e  
CALibration:ALIGn:TADD  
Commands  
Auto Meas  
Pressing the Auto Meas button on the front panel of the instrument performs  
an automatic measurement of the largest signal found in a full span sweep and  
places a marker at the signal peak. The signal must have at least 10 dB of  
excursion. (Refer to Peak Excursion (Marker Setup Panel)on page 3-57 for  
additional information.) Auto measure requires the connection of an external,  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
Auto Meas  
broadband or narrowband light source. If there is insufficient signal power, the  
automatic measurement will not be performed, and a warning message will be  
reported. This automatic measurement routine is normally the best way to  
adjust sensitivity while maintaining the fastest sweep rates.  
The auto measure function uses trace A to perform the measurement. Since  
the auto measure function can alter the instrument state, we recommend that  
this operation be performed before a measurement sequence is started.  
Aut o Measure Set up panel allows you to modify the auto measure span and  
the vertical scale, tune to the wavelength indicated by the marker, and opti-  
mize the sensitivity.  
Span selects the wavelength span for viewing the signal located by the auto  
measure function. If auto is specified, the span is set wide enough to display  
most of the signal. If a particular span is desired, deselect auto and put the  
desired span in the nm dialog box. The default selection for span is auto.  
No t e  
If the span is set too narrow, the auto measure operation may not complete  
successfully. If this happens a warning message is displayed.  
Scale/Div selection sets the vertical scale to be used after performing the  
auto measure function. If auto is specified, the measurement function sets the  
vertical scale to a value based on the dynamic range of the signal. If a particu-  
lar vertical scale is desired, deselect auto and put the desired dB/div in the dB  
dialog box. The default selection for dB/div is auto.  
Aut oMeas at Marker turns the auto measure marker on or off. Selecting the  
on state for auto measure at marker causes the auto measure function to per-  
form its operation at the wavelength of the active marker. This allows you to  
measure a signal other than the largest one found in a full span sweep. The  
default selection for auto measure at marker is off.  
Optimize Sensit ivity, when turned on, causes the auto measure function to  
set the sensitivity so the resulting measurement has a minimal amount of  
noise. It does this by finding the minimum in the measurement trace and com-  
paring this value to the known sensitivity of the instrument at that wave-  
length. Sensitivity is then reduced until the signal is close to this minimum  
sensitivity or the sweep time becomes too long. The Optimize Sensitivity func-  
tion is useful when viewing high dynamic range signals. The drawback to turn-  
ing this function ON is that it generally requires a longer sweep time to get  
better sensitivity. The default selection for Optimize Sensitivity is OFF.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Auto Ranging (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
No t e  
None of the Automeasure Setup parameters are affected by the front-panel  
Preset key. They are not saved as part of the measurement setup.  
Key Pat h  
Auto Meas  
Auto Align  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]  
Commands  
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:X{:SCALe]:AUTO:SPAN  
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:Y{:SCALe]:AUTO:PDIVision  
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TRACe:ALL[:SCALe][:AUTO]:MARKer OFF|ON|0|1  
Auto Ranging (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
When on, the auto ranging allows the OSA to achieve the desired sensitivity by  
taking several sweeps and switching between gain stages. The final trace data  
is a blended composite of each trace taken in the different gain stages.  
No t e  
The sweep time (ST) that is displayed in the lower portion of the display is the  
time that it takes for the OSA to sweep over one gain stage. The OSA may take  
up to three sweeps in three different gain stages to make the measurement.  
This depends on the settings for sensitivity, reference level, auto range and also  
the particular device being measured. The final data trace is a blended  
composite of each trace taken in the different gain stages. For more  
information, refer to Sweep Timeon page 3-89.  
Setting Auto Range to off will force the OSA to use a single gain stage and  
achieve the desired sensitivity by applying a digital filter.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Amplitude Setup > Auto Range  
SENSe:POWer:DC:RANGe:AUTO  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Auto Zero (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
Auto Zero (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
Turns Auto Zero on and off. Auto Zero on enables the internal amplifiers to be  
zeroed between sweeps. In this mode, the instrument compensates for tem-  
perature-related current drift between each sweep. Although this zeroing”  
increases amplitude accuracy, it also increases the time between sweeps. If  
amplitude accuracy is not critical to your measurement, turning off auto zero  
will improve throughput. Pressing the front-panel Preset key resets this func-  
tion to on.  
Tip: The instrument performs a more complete zeroing when the instrument  
is first turned on. You can run this more complete routine anytime by pressing  
the Zero Now (System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Ser-  
vice Functions > Zero Now) softkey.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Amplitude Setup > Auto Zero  
Zero Now  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALibration:ZERO  
Commands  
Averaging  
When averaging is on, you can select the number of measurement sweeps to  
be averaged, using the 10, 20, 50, 100 softkeys. You can also enter averaging  
values other than those displayed by using the numeric keypad or the knob.  
When the number of sweeps taken is less than the count, the following for-  
mula is used to calculate the data:  
sum of cu rrent sweeps  
AVG = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
n u mber of averages selected  
If the number of sweeps is greater than or equal to the count, the following  
formula is used to calculate the data:  
æ
ç
è
new measurement ö  
+ ----------------------------------------------------  
last average  
count 1  
= ----------------------- ×  
count  
÷
ø
New average  
count  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Backup Internal Memory  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Averaging  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage:COUNt  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage:STATe  
Backup Internal Memory  
Allows you to make a complete backup of user memory onto a floppy disk. All  
user files (measurement, trace, and specification sets) are saved. You can  
recall the backup contents into the instrument with the Restore Internal Mem-  
ory function. Refer to Backing Up or Restoring the Internal Memoryon  
page 2-20  
A screen appears asking you to insert a formatted floppy disk into the floppy  
drive. The disk will not be viewable on a PC and no trace or measurement files  
can be saved onto the disk until it is reformatted. The backup internal memory  
function overwrites the floppy disk with a new image, so only the latest  
backup information can be recovered through the Restore Internal Memory  
operation. Any existing files or catalogs on the floppy disk will be destroyed.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Backup/Restore Menu > Backup Internal Memory  
Backup/Restore Menu  
Accesses the instrument utilities used to backup or restore internal memory.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Backup/Restore Menu  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Bandwidth Marker Interpolation (Marker Setup Panel)  
Bandwidth Marker Interpolation (Marker Setup Panel)  
Turns the bandwidth marker interpolation on or off. When on, the bandwidth  
markers will be placed at the exact number of dB (NDB) from the normal  
marker, if within the trace range. The position of the marker will be linearly  
interpolated between the two nearest trace data points. The default state is  
on. If interpolate is off, for negative number of dB (NDB) values, the band-  
width markers will be at values closest to and more negative then the NDB  
value. For positive NDB values, the bandwidth markers will be at values clos-  
est to and more positive than the NDB values. This will typically result in a  
wider bandwidth measurement.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Bandwidth Marker Interpolation  
Active Marker, Delta Marker, Bandwidth Marker  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BANDwidth  
:INTerpolation  
Bandwidth/Sweep  
Accesses the menu that allows you to change bandwidth, sweep settings, fiber  
selection, trigger mode, and ADC sync. You can also access these functions  
from the Measure menu Bandwidth/Sweep selection. The function keys  
include:  
more BW/sweep functions  
repeat sweep  
res BW  
select fiber  
single sweep  
sweep time  
video BW  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
BW Marker Units (Marker Setup Panel)  
BW Marker Units (Marker Setup Panel)  
Sets the bandwidth marker X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when  
the instrument is in a non-zero span. The available selections are nm, µm, Ang,  
GHz, and THz. The default unit is nm (nanometers). This setting controls all  
four bandwidth markers. The normal and delta offset markers have their own  
settings.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > BW Marker Units  
Marker BW  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:READout  
Commands  
Calibration  
Accesses the Power Cal Setup and Wavelength Calibration Setup softkeys.  
The Power Calibration Setup panel will show the date of the last factory per-  
formed power calibration and the date of the last successful user-performed  
power calibration. It also allows you to set the calibration power and wave-  
length used for the next calibration. Refer to Calibrating Wavelength Mea-  
surementson page 2-14  
Set Calibration Power is the exact amplitude of the calibration source that  
will be used for the next power calibration. The power entered must be within  
+10 dBm and 3 dBm of the amplitude measured using the factory calibration.  
Set Calibration Wavelengt h is the approximate wavelength of the calibra-  
tion source that will be used for the next user power calibration. The wave-  
length entered must be within 2.5 nm of the wavelength measured using the  
factory calibration.  
Pressing the Perform Calibration softkey will display on-screen instructions  
for performing the calibration.  
Key Pat h  
Systems > Calibration  
Remot e  
CALibration:POWer:POWer  
Commands  
CALibration:POWer:Wavelength  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Calibrator Multi-Pt Align  
Calibrator Multi-Pt Align  
Adjusts the mechanical position of the instruments internal optical compo-  
nents ensuring amplitude accuracy of your measurements. Before initiating  
the alignment, connect the internal calibrator to the front-panel input connec-  
tor. Refer to External Multipoint Wavelength Calibrationon page 2-17  
The instrument automatically sets the start wavelength at 1490 nm, stop  
wavelength at 1590 nm, span, and reference level, and then performs a fully  
automatic, internal auto align. The input signal is aligned at equally spaced  
alignments (minimum 50 nm spacing between points) for the internal, multi-  
mode fiber or (minimum 5 nm spacing between points) for the external, sin-  
gle-mode fiber (Agilent 86144B/86146B only).  
No t e  
Error 5056, Trajectory align cannot find input signal, will occur if a broadband  
light source is not connected to the front-panel input connector.  
Error 5060, Trajectory align failed, will occur if the align procedure failed.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menus > Adv Service Functions  
> More Adv Service Menu > Multi-Point Align > Calibrator Multi-Pt Align  
Related Functions  
Auto Align & Add To Trajectory  
Auto Align Preset  
User Source Multi-Pt Align  
Remot e  
CALibration:ALIGn:INTernal  
Commands  
Center Wavelength (WL)  
Sets the center wavelength using the knob, step keys, or numeric keys. The  
span remains constant. The center wavelength and the start and stop wave-  
length settings are related as follows:  
+
stop wavelength  
start wavelength  
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Center Wavelength  
2
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Center WL  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Center Wavelength Step Size (Wavelength Setup Panel)  
Related Functions  
Start WL, Stop WL, Span  
Remot e  
SENSe:WAVelength:CENTer  
Commands  
Center Wavelength Step Size (Wavelength Setup Panel)  
Specifies the center wavelength step size. This is used for incrementing center  
wavelength using the and keys.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Wavelength Setup > Center Wavelength Step Size  
SENSe:WAVelength:CENTer:STEP:INCRement  
Remot e  
Commands  
Configure Network  
Starts a utility that allows you to enable and configure networking. Enter this  
menu only if you have all the necessary networking parameters. Refer to File  
Sharing and Printing over a Networkon page 2-26  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > Configure Net-  
work  
Current GPIB Address (Remote Setup Panel)  
Displays the GPIB address currently being used. To change the address, use  
the numeric keys, step keys, or knob to enter the new GPIB address informa-  
tion in the Remote Setup panel.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > GPIB Address  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Current Source Setup  
Current Source Setup  
Accesses the Current Source Setup panel that allows you to turn on or off the  
current source, set the current limit, enable pulse width, duty ratio, and syn-  
chronize the ADC sync output. Refer to Operating the Internal White Light  
Sourceon page 2-4  
Key Pat h  
System > Options > Current Source Setup  
ADC sync, current limit, pulse width, duty ratio  
SOURce:CURRent:PULSe:STATe ON|OFF  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
Date/Time (Display Setup Panel)  
Turns the date and time on the display on or off. When on, the date and time  
will appear on the displays lower, right corner of the display and on printouts.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup  
SYSTem:TIMe  
Related Functions  
Defines the math expression to be used and turns the math operation on:  
C=ALOG-B, C=ALOG+B, C=ALIN-B, or C=ALIN+B. The result is placed in Trace C.  
The math operation is performed in linear units.  
See Using Trace Math to Measure Wavelength Drifton page 2-29.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off > Default Math Trace C  
Remot e  
CALCulate3:MATH:STATE OFF|ON|0|1  
Commands  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Default Math Trace F  
Defines the math expression to be used and turns the math operation on:  
F=CLOG-D. The result is placed in Trace F. The math operation is performed in  
linear units.  
See Using Trace Math to Measure Wavelength Drifton page 2-29.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off > Default Math Trace F  
Remot e  
CALCulate6:MATH:STATE OFF|ON|0|1  
Commands  
Delete From (Delete Setup Panel)  
Selects whether to delete a file from a floppy disk, internal memory, or a net-  
worked file share.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Delete Menu > Delete File From  
Remot e  
MMEMory:DELete  
Commands  
Delete Menu  
Accesses the Delete Setup panel that allows you to delete files from a floppy  
disk, internal memory, or a networked file share.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Delete Menu  
Remot e  
MMEMory:DELete  
Commands  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Delta Marker On/Off  
This toggle function fixes the position of the reference marker and activates  
the delta marker. This measures the difference between the active (reference)  
marker and the delta marker. The front knob, step keys, or keypad can be  
used to move the delta marker to the desired location. Refer to Measuring the  
Difference between Traceson page 2-28  
If the delta function is turned on and no marker is active, Marker #1 will be  
turned on and placed at the center wavelength as a reference for the delta  
marker.  
No t e  
For Agilent 86144B/86146B only, if filter mode is enabled, the noise marker,  
delta marker, and OSNR marker are disabled.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Delta Marker  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:STATe  
Commands  
Delta Marker Units (Marker Setup Panel)  
Sets the delta marker X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the  
instrument is in a non-zero span. The available selections are nm, µm, Ang,  
GHz, and THz. The default units are nm (nanometers). This setting controls  
all four delta markers. The normal and bandwidth markers have their own set-  
tings.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Delta Marker Units  
Delta Marker  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:DELTa:X:READout  
Commands  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Display Mode  
Display Mode  
Accesses the choice of log (logarithmic) or lin (linear) data display.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Display mode  
Remot e  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic  
Commands  
Display Setup  
Accesses the display setup panel selections which include:  
active function area assist  
Agilent logo  
date/time  
filter mode instrument panels  
path change instrument panel  
title  
The Display Setup panel  
Setup panel  
selections  
Agilent Logo  
When this function is ON, the Agilent logo is shown on the display and print-  
outs.  
Da te/Time  
Turns the date and time ON or OFF on the display.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Display Setup  
Title  
Turns the title ON or OFF on the display.  
Active Function Area Assist  
Automatically sets the Active Function Area (when function is turned on) to  
the first or top softkey. For example, when you press the front-panel Band-  
width/Sweep key, the Active Function Area Assist function will set the Active  
Function Area to resolution bandwidth. This means you can immediately  
enter the desired resolution bandwidth. There is no need to press the Res BW  
softkey  
Pa th Cha nge Instr uctions Pa nels  
For the Agilent 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only  
Allows the choice of disabling the external path align setup instructions.  
Filter Mode instruction Pa nels  
For the Agilent 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only  
Allows the choice of disabling the auto align, auto measure, and take sweep  
setup instructions.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup  
DISPlay:WINDow:TEXT:DATA <string>  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Exchange Menu  
Exchange Menu  
Accesses the trace exchange selections which include:  
A Exchange B  
B Exchange C  
C Exchange A  
D Exchange A  
E Exchange A  
F Exchange A  
Exchanges the X- and Y-axis data of the two traces. The trace pairs that can be  
exchanged are Trace A with any trace, and Trace B with Trace C.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math > Exchange Menu  
TRACe:EXCHange  
Remot e  
Commands  
Factory Preset (IP)  
Performs an instrument preset and clears user settings that are not affected  
by Preset. That is, alignment settings, user calibration, multipoint amplitude  
correction data. User trace and measurement files will be maintained. See  
Preseton page 3-65.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Factory Preset (IP)  
Related Functions  
Preset  
Remot e  
CALibration:ALIGn:PRESet  
Commands  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Fast Meas Recall  
Fast Meas Recall  
Accesses the fast measure recall function that recalls the measurement state  
previously saved as FASTSAVE.dat in the internal memory by the Fast Mea-  
sure Save function. Refer to Recalling Data in Fast Meas Recall Modeon  
page 2-24  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Fast Meas Recall  
Recall, Fast Meas Save  
Related Functions  
Fast Meas Save  
Accesses the fast measure save function to save the current measurement  
state to internal memory as FASTSAVE.dat. Allows a quick save of the current  
state, which can then be recovered by the Fast Meas Recall function. Only one  
FASTSAVE.dat file exists, so performing a Fast Meas Save will overwrite any  
currently existing Fast Save file. Refer to Saving Data in Fast Meas Save  
Modeon page 2-20  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Fast Meas Save  
Save, Fast Meas Recall  
Related Functions  
File Name (Save Setup Panel)  
Selects automatic or manual mode for saving a filename.  
When Auto is selected, the measurement is automatically named and saved to  
an auto generated filename when the Auto Save softkey is pressed. Measure-  
ment data is saved to the filename ST_xxxxx.dat and Trace(s) only is saved to  
the filename TR_xxxxx.csv. xxxxxrepresents a numbering system which is  
incremented each time the measurement data is saved. For example, the first  
time you save Trace(s) only data, the filename TR_00001.csv will be assigned.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
When Manual is selected, pressing the Choose File to Save softkey will access  
the Filename Menu setup panel. Use the front panel step keys, knob, or arrow  
softkeys to highlight and then select each letter in the filename. Filenames can  
also be set with an external keyboard, Refer to Entering a Filename using an  
External Keyboardon page 2-23. When you finish entering the filename,  
press SAVE FILE.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Save Menu > File Name  
Remot e  
*SAV  
Commands  
Uses the LAN (local area network) to store, recall, and delete files on remote  
hard drives. The data can then be accessed and shared among the users.  
To access the file and printer share softkeys, you must first configure the net-  
work refer to Connecting to the OSA over the Networkon page 4-6 and  
enter the user share identity/user profile information for remote shares (refer  
to File Sharing and Printing over a Networkon page 2-26). The softkeys for  
file and printer share will then become available for selection.  
No t e  
No t e  
Samba® or Microsoft® software must be installed to run the file share programs.  
If networking is not configured, the command will generate a Settings conflict”  
error.  
Key Pat h  
Systems > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > File Shares  
Related  
Printer Share  
Commands  
Remot e  
Commands  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:USERname <param>  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:PASSword <param>  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:WORKgroup <param>  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Filter Marker Tune  
Filter Marker Tune  
For Agilent 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only.  
Tunes the wavelength of the preselector. During the preselector instrument  
mode, the instrument acts as an optical filter at a fixed wavelength. Although  
the instrument is not sweeping the displayed input range, the last sweep  
remains displaying the input spectrum. With filter marker tune softkey  
selected, use the front panel knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to change the  
preselector wavelength. Press Take Sweep to update the displayed response  
at any time.  
The amount of filtering is determined by the resolution bandwidth setting.  
Narrower resolution bandwidth settings will filter the signal more. If the reso-  
lution bandwidth is changed, Filter Marker Tune must be reselected to tune  
the monochromator. Marker movement will not tune the monochromator  
unless Marker Tune is active.  
The front panel, single mode preselector monochromator connector allows  
the channel drop capability to the Agilent 86130A BitAlyzer error perfor-  
mance analyzer or the Agilent 86100A Infinium digital communication ana-  
lyzer.  
No t e  
During filter mode, the noise marker, delta marker, and OSNR marker are  
disabled.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Switch Path Auto Align Now  
or Switch Path No Auto Align > Filter Marker Tune  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer:SRLevel  
INPut:FILTer:SCENt  
INPut:FILTer:SRLevel  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Filter Mode  
Filter Mode  
For Agilent 86141B only  
Accesses the filter mode function. Refer to Filter Modeon page 2-30  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode  
Remot e  
INSTrument:SELect FILTER”  
Commands  
Filter Mode  
For the Agilent 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only.  
The filter mode utilizes the 9 µm external optical path to increase dynamic  
range and resolution bandwidth with the Agilent 86144B and 86146B filter  
mode. An active tuning marker can be selected and tuned to the wavelength  
position. The filter marker becomes the current marker and has the active  
area focus. All other markers stay on. Refer to Analyzing Measurement Data”  
on page 2-27 for further information. Also see Filter Modeon page 2-35  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode  
INSTrument:SELect FILTER”  
Remot e  
Commands  
Filter Mode Instruction Panels  
For the Agilent 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only  
Allows the choice of disabling the auto align, auto measure, and take sweep  
setup instructions when switching from internal to external path.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup > Filter Mode Instrument  
Panels  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Firmware Upgrade  
Firmware Upgrade  
The instrument will restart into a utility to upgrade the instrument firmware.  
For upgrade instructions, or to order a firmware upgrade kit, visit or web site  
at http://www.agilent.com/cm/rdmfg/osa/downloads/  
8614xafirmware.shtml.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Firmware Upgrade  
Format Floppy Disk  
Formats a 3.5, 1.44 MB floppy disk. The instrument does not support format-  
ting 2.0 MB floppy disks. Refer to Saving, Recalling, and Managing Fileson  
page 2-19  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Format Floppy Disk  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
GPIB Address  
GPIB Address  
Accesses the GPIB address information. To change the address, use the  
numerical entry keys, step keys, or knob to enter the new GPIB address infor-  
mation. If changes are made, press the Select softkey. Press the Defaults soft-  
key to reset the address to the factory preset default, 23.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB Address & Network Setup > GPIB  
Address  
GPIB & Network Setup  
Accesses the functions used to set up networked file and printer shares on the  
analyzer.  
GPIB Address  
Configure Network  
User Share Identity  
File Shares  
Printer Shares  
Key Pat h  
System> More System Functions > GPIB Address & Network Setup  
Help  
Accesses error queues for: hardware errors, critical errors, notices, and warn-  
ings once an error queue is accessed. Also displays the instruments current  
firmware revision. Refer to Firmware Upgradeon page 3-30You can print the  
queue, clear the queue, or page up and down to view the information. If no  
hardware errors, critical errors, notices, or warnings have been generated,  
these functions will be shaded.  
Key Pat h  
System > Help  
Remot e  
Commands  
SYSTem:ERRor?  
*IDN?  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Hold A...F None Min Max (trace)  
Hold A...F None Min Max (trace)  
Hold Max compares the current amplitude value of each point on the active  
trace in the current sweep to the corresponding point detected during the  
previous sweep, then displays the maximum value.  
Hold Min compares the current amplitude value of each point on a trace in the  
current sweep to the corresponding point detected during the previous  
sweep, then displays the minimum value.  
Hold None turns the Hold function off.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Hold None Min Max  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum:STATe  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum:STATe  
Integrate Limit  
Calculates the power between Wavelength Marker 1 and Wavelength Marker 2  
when the trace integration function is on.  
Once wavelength markers have been turned on, the total power integration  
marker search, and wavelength sweep may be individually limited to the wave-  
length marker range.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu > Advanced Line  
Mkr Functions > Integrate Limit  
Related Functions  
Sweep Limit, Search Limit  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge:LOWer  
CALCulate:TPOWer:IRANge:UPPer  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Light Source  
Light Source  
Turns the desired light source on or off. The number and type of sources dis-  
played depends on the options installed. Refer to Operating the Internal  
White Light Sourceon page 2-4  
Key Pat h  
System > Options > Light Source  
Current Source Setup  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
SOURce:CATalog  
SOURce:STATe  
Line Marker Menu  
Accesses the following line marker functions:  
Advanced Line Mkr Functions  
Line Markers Off  
Wavelength Line Mkr 1  
Wavelength Line Mkr 2  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu  
Line Markers Off  
Turns off all line markers and line marker functions.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu > Line Markers Off  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SRANge:OFF  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Lin Math C=A–B  
Lin Math C=AB  
Subtracts Trace B from Trace A point by point, then stores the results in Trace  
C in linear units. If Trace A is in View On mode, this function is continuous and  
occurs every sweep. Results of the subtraction are referenced to 0 dB. This  
often requires a reference level adjustment. For example, if the reference  
level is set at 40 dBm, Trace A is at 50 dBm, and Trace B is at 55 dBm, the  
C=AB function places Trace C at 5 dB. Because this is off screen, the refer-  
ence level will need to be adjusted.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math OFF > Default Math Trace C > Lin Math C=AB  
CALCulate3:MATH:EXPRession(TRATRB)  
Remot e  
Commands  
Lin Math C=A+B  
Adds Trace A and Trace B point by point, then stores the results in Trace C in  
linear units. The results of this function often require a reference level adjust-  
ment. Trace A is placed in View On mode. Trace math is mainly used to nor-  
malize the display during stimulus-response measurements.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math OFF > Default Math Trace C > Lin Math C=A+B  
CALCulate3:MATH:EXPRession(TRA+TRB)  
Remot e  
Commands  
Local  
Restores front-panel control of the instrument. Whenever the instrument is in  
Remote mode, the RMT message is displayed on the instruments screen and  
all keys are disabled except for the front-panel Local key.  
Key Pat h  
Local  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Log Math C=AB  
Remot e  
GPIB GoTo Local Command  
Commands  
Log Math C=AB  
Subtracts Trace B from Trace A point by point, then stores the results in Trace  
C in logarithmic units. If Trace A is in View On mode, this function is continu-  
ous and occurs every sweep. Results of the subtraction are referenced to 0 dB.  
This often requires a reference level adjustment. For example, if the reference  
level is set at 40 dBm, Trace A is at 50 dBm, and Trace B is at 55 dBm, the  
C=AB function places Trace C at 5 dB. Because this is off screen, the refer-  
ence level will need to be adjusted.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math OFF > Default Math Trace C > Log Math C=AB  
Log Math C=A+B, Log Math F=CD  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate3:MATH:EXPRession(TRA/TRB)  
Commands  
Log Math C=A+B  
Adds Trace A and Trace B point by point, then stores the results in Trace C in  
logarithmic units. The results of this function often require a reference level  
adjustment. Trace A is placed in View On mode. Trace math is mainly used to  
normalize the display during stimulus-response measurements.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math OFF > Default Math Trace C > Log Math C=A+B  
Log Math C=AB, Log Math F=CD  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate3:MATH:EXPRession(TRA*TRB)  
Commands  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Log Math F=CD  
Log Math F=CD  
Subtracts Trace D from Trace C point by point, then stores the results in Trace  
F in logarithmic units. If Trace C is in View On mode, this function is continu-  
ous and occurs every sweep. Results of the subtraction are referenced to 0 dB.  
This often requires a reference level adjustment. For example, if the reference  
level is set at 40 dBm, Trace D is at 50 dBm, and Trace C is at  
55 dBm, the F=CD function places Trace F at 5 dB. Because this is off  
screen, the reference level will need to be adjusted.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math OFF > Default Math Trace F > Log Math F=CD  
Log Math C=AB, Log Math C=A+B  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate6:MATH:EXPRession(TRC/TRD)  
Commands  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Marker BW  
Marker BW  
Measures the passband of the signal. To enter the bandwidth amplitude of the  
bandwidth markers, make a selection from the softkeys  
(3 dB, 6 dB, 10 dB, and 20 dB) or use the knob, step keys, or numeric  
keys. Marker bandwidth information is displayed at the top of the graticule.  
If a peak search is not performed, then pressing Marker BW finds the band-  
width around the currently active marker. If the bandwidth markers cannot be  
placed at the selected value, an error message, such as “BW not found”  
will be displayed.  
See Using Span to Zoom Inon page 2-8.  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker BW  
Peak Search  
Key Pat h  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:STATe  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:INTerpolate  
(-0.5 dB|-3 dB|-6 dB|-10 dB|-20 dB)  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BWIDwidth:NDB  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:BANDwidth:RESult?  
Marker Off  
Turns the current active marker off.  
Key Pat h  
Markers >Active Marker > Marker Off  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:STATe OFF  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:AOFF  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Marker Search Menu  
Marker Search Menu  
Accesses the following marker peak and pit search functions:  
peak or pit search mode  
peak or pit search  
next peak down, left or right  
next pit up, left or right  
active markers  
The active markers can also be turned on or off from this menu, which avoids  
returning to the Marker menu to change markers.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu  
Marker Search Threshold Value (Marker Setup Panel)  
Sets the amplitude threshold value used for limiting the marker search func-  
tion. Any peaks below the threshold value will be ignored. When the Marker  
Search Threshold is on, a dotted line is shown on the display at the threshold  
level. The Use Marker Search Threshold function in the Marker Setup Panel  
must be enabled or the Marker Search Threshold Value will be greyed out.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Marker Search Threshold Value  
Pit Excursion, Peak Excursion, Marker Search Threshold  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate:THReshold  
Commands  
CALCulate:THReshold:STATe  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Marker Setup  
Marker Setup  
Accesses a menu that allows you to make changes to default marker settings.  
From the setup panel you can make changes to:  
Bandwidth/Marker Interpolation On|Off  
BW Marker Units  
Delta Marker Units  
Marker Search Threshold Value  
Noise Marker Reference Bandwidth  
Normal/Delta Marker Interpolation On|Off  
Normal Marker Units  
OSNR Noise  
Peak Excursion  
Peak Search at End of Each Sweep On|Off  
Pit Excursion  
Use Marker Search Threshold  
The Marker Setup panel  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Marker Setup  
Setup Panel  
Select ions  
Nor ma l Ma r ker Units  
Sets the X-axis immediately displayed marker information for frequency or  
wavelength when the instrument is in a non-zero span. This setting controls  
only the normal marker X-axis and the delta reference immediately displayed  
information. This setting controls all four normal markers. The bandwidth and  
delta offset markers have their own settings.  
BW Ma r ker Units  
Sets the bandwidth marker X-axis immediately displayed information for fre-  
quency or wavelength when the instrument is in a non-zero span. The delta  
markers have their own setting. This setting controls all four bandwidth mark-  
ers.  
Delta Ma r ker Units  
Sets the delta marker X-axis immediately displayed information for frequency  
or wavelength when the instrument is in a non-zero span. The bandwidth  
markers have their own setting. This setting controls all four delta markers.  
Norma l/Delta Ma rker Interpola tion  
Turns the normal/delta marker interpolation on or off. When interpolation is  
ON, the normal/delta markers will be placed at the exact wavelength or fre-  
quency value selected if it is within the trace range. The marker will linearly  
interpolate between two trace data points. The default state is off.  
This setting controls the interpolation state for all four markers when in the  
normal or delta mode. When interpolation is off, the marker will be placed at  
the trace point nearest the requested value.  
Ba ndwidth Ma r ker Inter pola tion  
Turns the bandwidth marker interpolation on or off. When interpolation is ON,  
the bandwidth markers will be placed at the exact number of dB (NDB) from  
the normal marker if within the trace range. The position of the marker will be  
linearly interpolated between two trace data points. The default state is ON. If  
interpolate is OFF, for negative NDB values, the bandwidth markers will be at  
values closest to and more negative than the NDB value. For positive NDB val-  
ues, the bandwidth markers will be at values closest to and more positive than  
the NDB values. This will typically result in a wider bandwidth measurement.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Function Reference  
Marker Setup  
Pea k Excursion  
Determines (in dB) which side modes are included in the measurements. To  
be accepted, each trace peak must rise, and then fall, by at least the peak  
excursion value about a given spectral component. The default value is 3 dB.  
Setting the value too high may result in not identifying a side mode. Setting  
the value too low may cause unwanted responses, including noise spikes, to be  
identified. Use the Marker Setup panel to change the peak excursion value.  
Peak excursion criteria  
Changing t he peak excursion. The peak searches may not recognize valid  
signals near the noise floor when the peak excursion definition is less than 3  
dB. Thus, before performing peak searches on signals near the noise floor,  
reduce the peak excursion value. However, reducing the excursion value often  
causes peak searches to identify noise spikes. To avoid this misidentification,  
use video averaging or video filtering to reduce the noise floor variance to a  
value less than the peak excursion definition.  
Pit E xcursion  
Sets the pit excursion value for the marker search routines.  
Pit excursion criteria  
The pit excursion value is used to determine whether or not a local minimum  
in the trace is to be considered a pit. To qualify as a pit, both sides of the local  
minimum must rise by at least the pit excursion value.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Marker Setup  
Changing t he pit excursion. The pit searches may not recognize valid sig-  
nals near the noise floor when the pit excursion definition is less than 3 dB.  
Thus, before performing pit searches on signals near the noise floor, reduce  
the pit excursion value. However, reducing the excursion value often causes  
pit searches to identify noise spikes. To avoid this misidentification, use video  
averaging or video filtering to reduce the noise floor variance to a value less  
than the pit excursion definition.  
Use Ma r ker Sea r ch Thr eshold  
This limits the marker search function to data points above the selected  
threshold level. When Marker Search Threshold is ON, a dotted line is shown  
on the display at the threshold level.  
Ma rker Sea rch Threshold Va lue  
Selects the amplitude threshold value used for limiting the marker search  
function.  
Noise Ma rker Reference Ba ndwidth  
Sets the normalization bandwidth for the noise and OSNR marker. There are  
two allowable settings: 1 nm and 0.1 nm.  
Note  
Changing this value will change the value of the noise marker by 10 dB.  
Pea k Sea rch a t End of Ea ch Sweep  
Finds the peak value of the trace and moves the active marker to the peak at  
the end of each sweep. This function operates on the normal, delta, band-  
width, noise markers, and OSNR.  
OSNR Noise  
Determines how the noise markers are to be calculated, Pit, Auto, or Manual.  
The default is Auto mode.  
Pit: Uses the pit excursion criteria to find the closest pits from the center  
marker. Noise markers will be placed at the two pits.  
Aut o: Uses a fixed offset, coupled with the resolution bandwidth, from the  
center marker.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Marker to Center  
RBW  
æ
è
ö
------------ + 5nm  
ø
2
Manual: Uses a user specified fix offset from the center marker. The default  
value is 0.4 nm and the step size is 0.2 nm when using the step keys. This  
field is inactive when set to Auto or Pit.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup  
Marker to Center  
Changes the center wavelength to the wavelength of the active marker.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker to Center  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SCENter  
Commands  
Marker to Ref Level  
Changes the reference level to the amplitude of the active marker.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker to Ref Level  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer:SRLevel  
Commands  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Markers  
Marker Tune  
For Agilent 86141B only  
Tunes the wavelength of the preselector. During the preselector instrument  
mode, the instrument acts as an optical filter at a fixed wavelength. The out-  
put is available at the front panel Monochromator connector. Although the  
instrument is not sweeping the displayed input range, the last sweep remains  
displayed in order to show the input spectrum. A displayed marker indicates  
the wavelength of the preselection. With this softkey selected, use the front  
panel knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to change the preselector wave-  
length. Press Take Sweep to update the displayed response at any time. The  
amount of filtering is determined by the resolution bandwidth setting.  
If the resolution bandwidth is selected, Marker Tune must be reselected to  
tune the monochromator. Marker movement will not tune the monochromator  
unless Marker Tune is active.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Marker Tune  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer:SRLevel  
Commands  
Markers  
Accesses a menu that allows you to select and control trace markers. The  
Markers keys can be accessed using the front panel Markers key or the Mea-  
sure menu Markers selection.  
See Tips for Using Traces and Markerson page 2-27, Tips for Using Traces  
and Markerson page 2-27, and Using Trace Math to Measure Wavelength  
Drifton page 2-29.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
More Marker Functions  
Measurement Mode  
For Agilent 86141B/86144B/86146B only  
Accesses filter mode and power meter mode.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes  
Related Functions  
Filter mode, Power Meter mode  
Remot e  
Commands  
INSTrument:NSELect  
INSTrument:SELect  
More Marker Functions  
Accesses the following marker search functions:  
delta marker  
marker BW  
marker search menu  
OSNR marker  
noise marker  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions  
More System Functions  
Accesses the following functions:  
auto measure setup  
display setup  
GPIB & network setup  
service menu  
set time/date  
state info  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Move Active Area  
Move Active Area  
Moves the active function area to one of eight on-screen locations. To change  
the active function area location, press the Move Active Area softkey until you  
are satisfied with the position.  
Key Pat h  
System > Move Active Area  
Move Power Display Area  
For Agilent 86141B/86144B/86146B only  
Moves the power meter mode display area to one of eight on-screen locations.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Power Meter Mode > Move Power Display  
Area  
Remot e  
DISPlay{:WINDow[1]]:POPup[1|2|3|4][:ALL] OFF|ON1|2  
Commands  
Multi-Point Align  
Accesses the internal, external, and multi-point alignment functions:  
auto align preset  
calibrator multi-pt align  
marker tune  
user source multi-pt align  
See Auto Alignon page 3-10  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions >  
More Adv Service Menu > Multi-Point Align  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
New GPIB Address (Remote Setup Panel)  
New GPIB Address (Remote Setup Panel)  
Allows you to enter a new GPIB address. To change the address, use the  
numeric entry keys, step keys, or knob. Press the Defaults softkey to reset the  
address to the factory preset default, 23.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > GPIB Address  
Current GPIB Address  
Related Functions  
Next Peak Down ↓  
Places the active marker on the next highest peak down from the current  
marker amplitude. This peak must meet the peak excursion and threshold cri-  
teria. If the specified marker is off, it will be turned on and placed at the cen-  
ter wavelength. The search for the next maximum will reference that point.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Next Peak ↓  
Remot e  
:CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:NEXT  
Commands  
Next Peak Left ←  
Places the marker on the next peak located at a lower X-axis value (usually  
wavelength) than the current marker position. This peak must meet the peak  
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is off, it will be turned  
on and placed at the center wavelength or frequency.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu >Next Peak ←  
Remot e  
:CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:LEFT  
Commands  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Next Peak Right  
Next Peak Right →  
Places the marker on the next peak located at a higher X-axis value (usually  
wavelength) than the current marker position. This peak must meet the peak  
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is off, it will be turned  
on and placed at the center wavelength or frequency.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Next Peak →  
Remot e  
:CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum:RIGHt  
Commands  
Next Pit Left ←  
Places the marker on the next pit located at a lower X-axis value (usually  
wavelength) than the current marker position. This pit must meet the pit  
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is off, it will be turned  
on and placed at the center wavelength or frequency.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Next Pit ←  
Remot e  
:CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:LEFT  
Commands  
Next Pit Right →  
Places the marker on the next pit located at a higher X-axis value (usually  
wavelength) than the current marker position. This pit must meet the pit  
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is off, it will be turned  
on and placed at the center wavelength or frequency.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Next Pit →  
Remot e  
:CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:RIGHt  
Commands  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Next Pit Up ↑  
Next Pit Up ↑  
Places the active marker on the next lowest pit from the current marker  
amplitude. This pit must meet the pit excursion and threshold criteria. If the  
specified marker is off, it will be turned on and placed at the center wave-  
length. The search for the next minimum will reference that point.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Next Pit ↑  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum:NEXT  
Commands  
Noise Marker  
Measures the spectral power density at the position of the active marker. The  
measurement is referenced to 0.1 nm or 1.0 nm reference bandwidth. The ref-  
erence bandwidth used to normalize the noise is selected on the marker setup  
panel.  
No t e  
For Agilent 86144B/86146B only, if filter mode is enabled, the noise marker,  
delta marker, and OSNR marker are disabled.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Noise Marker  
Active Marker  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:STATe OFF|ON|0|1  
Commands  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Normal/Delta Marker Interpolation (Marker Setup Panel)  
Normal/Delta Marker Interpolation (Marker Setup  
Panel)  
Turns the normal/delta marker interpolation on or off. When on, the normal/  
delta markers will be placed at the exact wavelength or frequency value  
selected if it is within the trace range. The marker will linearly interpolate  
between two trace data points. When off, the marker will be placed on the  
nearest trace data point.  
This setting enables interpolation for all four markers when in normal or delta  
mode.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Normal/Delta Marker Interpolation  
Active Marker, Delta Marker  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:INTerpolation  
Commands  
Normal Marker Units (Marker Setup Panel)  
Sets the marker X-axis readout for frequency or wavelength when the instru-  
ment is in a non-zero span. The X-axis default units is nm (nanometers). This  
setting controls only the normal marker X-axis readout and the delta refer-  
ence readout. This setting controls all four normal markers. The bandwidth  
and delta offset markers have their own setting.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Normal Marker Units  
Active Marker  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:X:READout  
Commands  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
OSNR Marker  
OSNR Marker  
Indicates the signal quality based on the signal strength and noise level. Turn-  
ing on the OSNR marker will display four markers: an active marker, a center  
marker, and two noise markers. To adjust the active marker to the desired  
measurement location, use the step keys, knob, or keyboard. The center  
marker is positioned at the closest peak to the active marker. The location of  
the noise markers is determined by the selection of the Noise Method and the  
center marker. The noise measurement is referenced to 0.1 nm noise resolu-  
tion bandwidth.  
No t e  
For Agilent 86144B/86146B only, if filter mode is enabled, the noise marker,  
marker BW, delta marker, and OSNR marker are disabled.  
= noise marker symbols  
N = interpolated noise  
Na = interpolated noise amplitude  
P = peak  
Pa = peak amplitude  
Pw = center wavelength  
Center amplitude = Pa Na  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
OSNR Marker  
Center amplitude  
OSNR = ---------------------------------------------------  
Na (normalized)  
Interpola ting Noise  
To accurately measure noise, the noise level must be determined at the signal  
wavelength. The measurement cannot be directly performed because the sig-  
nal power level masks the noise. To estimate the noise at the signal wave-  
length, the OSA measures the noise power above and below the channel  
wavelength at the predetermined offset or pits (depending on the Noise  
Method selected in the Marker Setup panel). Next, the values are linearly  
interpolated to determine the noise value at the channel wavelength.  
Error Messa ges  
OSNR error messages are displayed in red letters and are described below  
with suggestions to correct the error.  
Noise Not Found can be displayed for two different conditions. The first  
condition occurs when Pit mode is selected, and the left or right marker is  
unable to find a pit using the Pit Excursion (selected in the Marker Setup  
panel).  
The second condition occurs when auto or manual mode is selected and the  
left or right marker is outside the span. In this case, the noise measurement is  
made at the spans end point.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
OSNR Marker  
Noise Not Found error message  
Tip: If this error occurs, decrease the pit excursion (when you are in pit  
mode), increase the span (when you are in auto or manual mode), or select  
manual (when you select auto mode) to adjust the offset.  
Center Not Found and OSNR Not Valid occurs if no signal or peaks are  
found.  
OSNR Not Found occurs if the noise level is higher than the signal level.  
Tip: If no signal or no peaks are found error occurs, reduce the peak excur-  
sion and/or threshold values. If the noise level if higher than the signal level,  
change to Pit Mode or manually adjust the offset.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
OSNR Marker  
Center Not Found error message  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > OSNR Marker  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:FUNCtion:OSNR[:STATe}  
OFF|ON|0|1  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
Options  
Options  
Accesses the Current Source Setup and Light Source Output Setup softkeys.  
Current Source Set up panel allows you to set the current limit, enable pulse  
mode and synchronize the ADC sync output. See Current Source Setupon  
page 3-20  
Light Source panel turns the desired light source on or off. The number and  
type of sources displayed depends on the options installed. See Light Source”  
on page 3-33  
Key Pat h  
System > Options  
SOURce[n]:STATe  
Remot e  
Commands  
OSA Extended State Information  
Displays the OSA extended state information:  
Align Pos (Internal)  
Align X (Internal)  
Align Y (Internal)  
Amp Corr  
Grat Offset  
Grating Order  
Hi Gain TransZ amplifier stage value  
Line Spacing  
Lo Gain TransZ amplifier stage value  
S1  
Trajectory alignment Data (Internal)  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
> More Adv Service Menu > Extended State Info  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
OSA State  
OSA State  
Displays the state information. The state information includes:  
center wavelength  
model #  
options  
serial #  
software revision  
span  
start wavelength  
stop wavelength  
wavelength offset  
wavelength step  
You can print this information using the internal or external printer.  
System > More System Functions > OSA State  
Key Pat h  
For the Agilent 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only  
Allows the choice of disabling the external path align setup instructions. Refer  
to Switch Path Auto Align Nowon page 3-90 and to Switch Path No Auto  
Alignon page 3-91.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Peak to Center  
Peak to Center  
Finds the highest amplitude trace point and sets the center wavelength to that  
wavelength.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Peak to Center  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SCENter  
SENSe:WAVelength:CENTer  
Peak Excursion (Marker Setup Panel)  
Sets the peak excursion value for the marker search functions.  
Peak excursion criteria  
For marker search functions, a signal peak is defined as a rise and fall in the  
displayed response by at least the peak excursion value. If peak excursion is  
set too high, legitimate peaks may not be discerned as signals. With lower val-  
ues more signals will be discerned, but peaks in the noise floor may also be  
discerned as signals. To reduce the noise floor variance to a value less than the  
peak excursion rate, try using video averaging and/or lowering the sensitivity.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Peak Excursion  
Related Functions  
Marker Search Threshold, Next Peak Down , Next Peak Right , Next  
Peak Left ←  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion:PEAK  
Commands  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Peak Search  
Peak Search  
Places a marker on the highest amplitude trace point. If no marker is on,  
Marker #1 will be used for the peak search.  
Next Pea k Down  
Places the marker on the next highest peak from the current marker ampli-  
tude. This next highest peak must meet the peak excursion and threshold cri-  
teria. If the specified marker is OFF, it will be turned ON, placed at the center  
wavelength, and the search for the next maximum will begin from that point.  
Next Pea k Left  
Places the marker on the next peak located at a shorter wavelength than the  
current marker wavelength position. This next peak must meet the peak  
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is OFF, it will be  
turned ON, placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the left will  
begin from that point.  
Next Pea k Right  
Places the marker on the next peak located at a longer wavelength than the  
current marker wavelength position. This next peak must meet the peak  
excursion and threshold criteria. If the specified marker is OFF, it will be  
turned ON, placed at the center wavelength, and the search to the right will  
begin from that point.  
Active Ma rker....  
Turns a particular marker ON or OFF. Turning a marker OFF will turn off any  
marker function that was on for that particular marker. When the marker is  
marker is ON, Marker #1 will be turned ON and placed on the highest point of  
the active trace.  
NOTE  
For addition information on setting the peak and pit excursion criteria, see Peak  
Excursionand Pit Excursionon page 3-41.  
See Tips for Using Traces and Markerson page 2-27  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Function Reference  
Peak Search at End of Each Sweep (Marker Setup Panel)  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Peak Search  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Search Mode  
Peak > Peak Search  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum  
Commands  
Peak Search at End of Each Sweep (Marker Setup  
Panel)  
Finds the peak value of the trace and moves the active marker to the peak at  
the end of each sweep. This function operates on normal, delta, and band-  
width markers.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Peak Search at End of Each Sweep  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum  
Remot e  
Commands  
Peak to REF LEVEL  
Sets the value of the reference level equal to the value of the highest point on  
the active trace.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Peak to REF LEVEL  
Reference Level  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SRLevel  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Perform Calibration  
Perform Calibration  
Performs a power or wavelength calibration after the setup has been specified  
by the user.  
Key Pat h  
System > Calibration > Power Cal Setup > Perform Calibration  
CALibration:WAVelength:INTernal  
Remot e  
Commands  
Pit Excursion (Marker Setup Panel)  
Sets the pit excursion value for the marker search routines.  
Pit excursion criteria  
The pit excursion value is used to determine whether or not a local minimum  
in the trace is to be considered a pit.  
For marker search functions, a signal pit is defined as having a fall and then a  
rise in the displayed response of at least the pit excursion value. Reducing the  
pit excursion to values less than 3 dB may cause the marker-pitting functions  
to identify noise spikes as pits. To reduce the noise floor variance to a value  
less than the pit excursion rate, try changing the reference level at the top of  
the graticule and increasing sensitivity.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Pit Excursion  
Marker Search Threshold  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:PEXCursion:PIT  
Commands  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Pit Search  
Pit Search  
Places a marker on the lowest amplitude trace point which meets the pit  
excursion criteria. If no marker is on, Marker #1 will be used for the pit search.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Search Mode Pit  
> Pit Search  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum  
Commands  
Power Calibration Setup  
Accesses the setup panel to set the calibration power and calibration wave-  
length.  
Set Calibration Power is the exact amplitude of the calibration source that  
will be used for the next power calibration. The power entered must be within  
+10 dB and 3 dB of the amplitude measured using the factory calibration.  
Set Calibration Wavelengt h is the approximate wavelength of the calibra-  
tion source that will be used for the next user power calibration. The wave-  
length entered must be within 2.5 nm of the wavelength measured using the  
factory calibration.  
Power Calibration External Pat h enables power calibration for the exter-  
nal fiber path (path 2). Calibration for Path 1 is always enabled. A 9 µm patch-  
cord must be connected between the Monochromator Output and the  
Photodetector Input before performing a power calibration on the external  
path.  
Key Pat h  
System > Calibration > Power Cal Setup  
Remot e  
CALibration:POWer  
Commands  
CALibration:WAVelength  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Power Calibration Setup  
Power Display  
For 86141B/86144B/86146B only  
In Power Meter mode, turns power display on or off.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Power Meter Mode > Power Display  
Remot e  
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:POPup[1|2|3|4][:ALL] OFF|ON|0|1  
Commands  
Power Meter Mode  
For 86141B/86144B/86146B only  
Power meter operation is an operation mode available on the 86141B/86144B/  
86146B instruments. Power meter mode displays the broadband power of the  
input light over time. The input light is directly connected to the instruments  
photodetector. This bypasses the internal monochromator and prevents any  
filtering by the resolution bandwidth filters. With power meter mode, you can  
perform the following:  
measure total power of broadband light sources  
monitor power as a function of time  
Monitoring power enables you to observe both long and short term drift and to  
perform real-time adjustments. Power meter mode places the instrument in  
the following settings:  
Mode  
Setting  
Sweep time  
10 s  
Amplitude units  
Amplitude scale  
Video bandwidth  
logarithmic  
5 db/division  
100 Hz  
The input light is connected to the front panel Photodetector Input connector  
for measurement. The front panel Monochromator Input and Monochromator  
Output connectors are not used in power meter mode.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Power Calibration Setup  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Power Meter Mode  
Remot e  
Commands  
INSTrument:SELect?  
INSTrument:NSELect  
Power Meter Zero  
For Agilent 86141B/86144B/86146B only  
Zeros the power meter detector to provide more accurate measurements.  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Power Meter Mode > Power Meter Zero  
Key Pat h  
Related Functions  
Power display  
Power meter mode  
Remot e  
CALibration:ZERO[:AUTO] ONCE  
Commands  
Power Meter Units  
For Agilent 86141B/86144B/86146B only  
Displays the power meter units automatically in watts or in dBm.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Power Meter Mode > Pwr Mtr Units  
Remot e  
CALibration:POWer:VALue <param>  
Commands  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Power On State IP/Last  
Power On State IP/Last  
Selects the state, IP or Last, of the instrument when it is turned on. The  
default state is IP.  
If IP is selected, the instrument will turn on in a known, preset state. With the  
settings as they would be after pressing the front-panel Preset key. For a list of  
parameter settings, Refer to Preseton page 3-65.  
If Last state is selected, the instrument will turn on with the settings as they  
were when the instrument was turned off. This is equivalent to recalling a  
saved instrument state or measurement file.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Power On State IP/Last  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
Preset  
Preset  
Resets the instrument to a known preset state. Selecting preset aborts any  
current operations and clears the GPIB output queue. Preset leaves some set-  
tings in place, for example, the title on the display.  
Table 3-7. Default values  
Preset  
Value  
Preset  
Value  
Function  
Function  
Start wavelength  
600 nm  
0
Stop wavelength  
1700 nm  
Auto  
Wavelength offset  
Resolution bandwidth  
Wavelength step size  
Auto  
Resolution bandwidth to span 0.01  
ratio  
Wavelength units  
Wavelength limit  
nm  
Medium  
Vacuum  
On  
Grating order  
Auto  
9
Power reference level  
0 dBm  
Power reference level  
position  
Power scale  
10 dB/div  
5
Ratio reference level  
0 dB  
10 dB/div  
Auto  
Off  
Ratio reference level position  
Amplitude units  
Ratio scale  
Ratio unitsa  
Auto  
Off  
Amplitude correction  
Sensitivity  
Source mode  
Auto  
On  
Video bandwidth  
Trans-Z lock  
Auto  
Off  
Auto range  
Repetitive sweep  
Auto chop  
On  
Sweep time  
Auto  
Off  
Off  
Gated sweep  
Trigger mode  
Normal  
Off  
ADC trigger delay  
Sweep limit  
10 µs  
Off  
ADC sync out  
Trace length  
1001  
100%  
Enabled  
On  
Current source pulse width  
Auto zero  
100 µs  
On  
Current source duty cycle  
User wavelength calibration  
Graticule  
User power calibration  
Annotation  
Enabled  
On  
Current marker  
MKR 1  
On  
Normal marker interpolation  
Normal marker units  
Peak search threshold  
Peak search excursion  
Off  
Bandwidth marker interpolation  
Bandwidth marker units  
Threshold enable  
Pit search excursion  
Marker search limit  
nm  
nm  
90 dBm  
3 dB  
Off  
3 dB  
Off  
Peak search on end-of-sweep Off  
Line markers  
OSNR Mode  
OSNR Offset  
Off  
Marker noise normalization  
bandwidth  
1 nm  
auto  
0.4 nm  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Print  
Preset  
Value  
Preset  
Value  
Function  
Function  
Marker 14  
Off  
Marker 14 bandwidth  
Marker 14 delta  
Off  
Off  
Marker 14 bandwidth  
3 dB  
amplitude  
Marker 14 noise  
Off  
Marker 14 delta marker  
nm  
units  
Current trace  
TRA  
Off  
Trace integration  
Trace mean  
Off  
Off  
100  
On  
Trace integration limit  
Trace mean limit  
Trace data formata  
TRBTRF visibility  
TRBTRF update  
TRATRF max hold  
TRATRF trace math  
Off  
Trace average count  
TRA visibility  
ASCII  
Off  
TRA update  
On  
Off  
TRATRF min hold  
TRATRF averaging  
TRBTRF data  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
3-point  
dummy trace  
Fiber stateb  
Raw trace  
3-point  
Internal  
dummy trace  
a. Accessible only via the remote interface.  
b. For 86144B/86146B only.  
Key Pat h  
Preset  
Related Functions  
Factory Preset (IP)  
SYSTem:PRESet  
Remot e  
Commands  
Print  
The print function can be accessed by the front panel print key or by using the  
drop-down File menu print selection. Use this function to print a copy of the  
display. Print location is determined by the Printer Setup panel. See File  
Sharing and Printing over a Networkon page 2-26  
Remot e  
HCOPy:IMMediate  
Commands  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Printer Setup  
Printer Setup  
Accesses the printer setup panel that allows you to select either the internal  
printer or external printer as the print destination.  
Key Pat h  
System > Printer Setup  
HCOPy:DESTination  
Remot e  
Commands  
Uses the LAN (local area network) to print data to network printers. The data  
can be printed on designated, PCL3 format or newer printers.  
To access the printer share softkeys, you must first configure the network  
refer to Connecting to the OSA over the Networkon page 4-6 and enter the  
user share identity/user profile information for remote shares (refer to File  
Sharing and Printing over a Networkon page 2-26). The softkeys for file and  
printer share will then become available for selection.  
No t e  
No t e  
Samba® or Microsoft® software must be installed to run the file share programs.  
If networking is not configured, the command will generate a Settings conflict”  
error.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > Printer Shares  
Recall (Recall Setup Panel)  
Selects whether all measurement data or only trace data will be recalled from  
internal memory or floppy disk or network file shares. See Recalling Measure-  
ment and Trace Dataon page 2-24  
When Measurement (All Visible + State) is selected, all instrument conditions  
will be recalled. When the file is recalled, the instrument state will be set to  
the same state as when the file was saved.  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Recall From (Recall Setup Panel)  
When Trace(s) Only is selected, the trace data is displayed under the current  
instrument conditions.  
No t e  
To insure accurate measurements, a wavelength calibration should be  
performed each time measurement is recalled from memory.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Recall Menu > Recall  
Remot e  
(Measurement) *RCL  
Commands  
(Trace Only):MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe  
(File Share):MMEMory:CATalog?FSHare1FSHare2|FSHare3|FSHare4  
Recall From (Recall Setup Panel)  
Selects whether the data is recalled from a floppy disk, from internal memory,  
or from network file share. See Recalling Measurement and Trace Dataon  
page 2-24  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Recall Menu > Recall From  
Remot e  
Commands  
*RCL FLOPpy|INTernal|Network File Share  
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Recall Menu  
Recall Menu  
Accesses the Recall Setup panel for the following settings:  
Recall (all measurement data or trace data only)  
Recall From (recall from a floppy disk or from the internal drive  
Network File Share 1|2|3|4  
Network File Path  
No t e  
To insure accurate measurements, a wavelength calibration should be  
performed each time measurement data is recalled from memory.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Recall Menu  
Remot e  
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe  
Commands  
Reference Level  
Specifies the reference level value, the maximum expected power to be mea-  
sured, at the reference level position. The reference level position is indicated  
on the display by a dashed green line and the REF annotation on the display.  
The default position is one major graticule division from the top of the display.  
The reference level is entered in dBm. Use the Amplitude Setup panel to  
change the reference level position. See Reference Level Position (Amplitude  
Setup Panel)on page 3-70  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Reference Level  
Related Functions  
Amplitude Setup (Reference Level Position), Scale/Div  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Reference Level Position (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
Reference Level Position (Amplitude Setup Panel)  
Determines the position of the reference level on the graticule. Setting this  
value to zero divisions places the reference level on the very bottom of the  
grid. Setting the reference level to 10 divisions places the reference level at  
the top of the grid. The default (or preset) position is 9 divisions, which is one  
major graticule down from the top of the display.See Reference Levelon  
page 3-69  
The reference level position can be changed using the knob, step keys, or  
numeric keypad.When using the knob or step keys, the value will automati-  
cally change. When using the numeric keypad, a terminator must be selected  
from the softkey panel.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Amplitude Setup > Reference Level Position  
Amplitude Units, Amp Display Mode, Reference Level, Scale/Div  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLPOS  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
Remote File Share Panel  
Uses the LAN (local area network) to store, recall, or delete data to remote  
hard drives. The data can then be accessed and shared among the users and  
printed on designated, network printers. See Recalling Measurement and  
Trace Dataon page 2-24  
No t e  
To access the file and printer share softkeys, you must first configure the  
network and enter the user share identity/user profile information for remote  
shares. The softkeys for file and printer share will then become available for  
selection.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > File Shares >  
Remote File Shares  
Related Functions  
Remote Printer Share  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Remote Printer Share Panel  
Remot e  
Commands  
MMEMORY:FSHAre [1|2|3|4][:PATH] <param>  
MMEMORY:FSHAre [1|2|3|4][:ADDRess]<param>  
Remote Printer Share Panel  
Uses the LAN (local area network) to print to designated, network printers.  
See Recalling Measurement and Trace Dataon page 2-24  
No t e  
To access the file and printer share softkeys, you must first configure the  
network and enter the user share identity/user profile information for remote  
shares. The softkeys for file and printer share will then become available for  
selection.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > Printer Shares  
> Remote File Share  
Related Functions  
Remote File Share  
Remot e  
HCOPy:DEVice:PSHare[1|2|3|4][:PATH]<param>  
Commands  
HCOPy:DEVice:PSHare[1|2|3|4]:ADDRess<param>  
HCOPy:DESTinationSYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[1|2|3|4]  
Repeat Sweep  
Sweeps the spectrum continuously and updates the measurement data after  
each sweep. Repeat Sweep ensures evenly timed sweeps for a stable display of  
the current tuning range. Sweeps will continuously repeat as long as the  
instrument is in repeat sweep mode. The SWEEP indicator light on the front  
panel of the instrument is on when the sweep is in progress. See Single  
Sweepon page 3-86  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > Repeat Sweep  
Single Sweep  
Related Functions  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Res BW  
Remot e  
INITiate:CONTinuous  
Commands  
Res BW  
Sets the resolution bandwidth value to be used. This determines the instru-  
ments ability to display two closely spaced signals as two distinct responses.  
The resolution bandwidth can be set to one of the following values:  
For 86140B Option 025, 86143B option 025, 86141B: 0.07 nm, 0.1 nm, 0.2  
nm, 0.3 nm, 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 5 nm, 10 nm.  
For 86140B, 86142B, 86143B, 86145B: 0.06 nm, 0.1 nm, 0.2 nm, 0.3 nm, 0.5  
nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 5 nm, 10 nm.  
For 86144B, 86146B int ernal pat h: 0.06 nm, 0.07 nm, 0.1 nm, 0.14 nm, 0.2  
nm, 0.33 nm, 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 5 nm, 10 nm.  
For 86144B, 86146B ext ernal pat h: 0.04 nm, 0.05 nm, 0.07 nm, 0.1 nm, 0.2  
nm, 0.3 nm, 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 5 nm, 10 nm.  
In Auto mode, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span in a preset  
0.01:1 ratio. This means that the instrument attempts to set a bandwidth value  
that is 1% of the span setting. You can alter this behavior by manually setting  
the resolution bandwidth.  
For the greatest measurement range and signal to noise ratio performance, a  
resolution bandwidth of 10 nm is recommended. Narrower bandwidths can be  
used if greater wavelength resolution is required.  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > Res BW  
Remot e  
Commands  
SENSe:BANDwidth:RESolution:AUTO  
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:RESolution  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
Reset Min/Max Hold  
Reset Min/Max Hold  
Resets trace hold data and returns to the Traces function keys where you can  
select an active trace, trace input, update, view, and hold functions.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Hold (trace) > Reset Min/Max Hold  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum:CLEar  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum:CLEar  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MAXimum:STATe  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MINimum:STATe  
Accesses the instrument restore utility. This operation will remove all existing  
files from internal memory (that is, measurement, trace, and specification  
sets) and replace them with files from a floppy disk. These files are created  
using the Backup Internal Memory function. See Backing Up or Restoring the  
Internal Memoryon page 2-20  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Backup/Restore Menu > Restore Internal Memory  
Revision  
Displays the instruments firmware revision information. See Helpon  
page 3-31 and Firmware Upgradeon page 3-30.  
Key Pat h  
System > Help > Revision  
*IDN?  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Save (Save Setup Panel)  
Save (Save Setup Panel)  
Selects whether all measurement data or only trace data will be saved. See  
Saving Measurement and Trace Dataon page 2-20.  
When Measurement (All Visible + State) is selected, all instrument conditions  
will be saved. The measurement data is saved in binary format (.dat file). This  
includes the traces and all measurement conditions. The .dat file format can  
only be read by the instrument. You will not be able to view this file on your  
PC. When the file is recalled, the instrument state will be set to the same state  
as when the file was saved.  
The Trace(s) Only files are saved in comma separated variable (.csv) format.  
When the file is recalled, the trace data is displayed under the current instru-  
ment conditions.  
the filename ST_xxxxx.dat and Trace(s) only is saved to the filename  
TR_xxxxx.csv. xxxxxrepresents a numbering system which is incremented  
each time the measurement data is saved. For example, the first time you save  
Trace(s) only data, the filename TR_00001.csv will be assigned. Otherwise, a  
filename can be specified, refer to Entering a Filename Using the Arrow  
Keyson page 2-23 and to Entering a Filename using an External Keyboard”  
on page 2-23.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Save Menu > Save:  
Remot e  
(Measurement) *SAV  
Commands  
(Traces Only):MMEMory:STORe:TRACe  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Save Graphics (Save Setup Panel)  
Save Graphics (Save Setup Panel)  
Saves graphic data in CGM or GIF format.  
The CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) format is a vector graphics format  
that describes pictures and graphical elements in geometric terms.  
The GIF (Graphics Interchange format) is a cross platform graphic standard.  
GIF formats are commonly used on many different platforms and readable by  
many different types of software.  
This selection is only valid when saving to the floppy drive.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Save Menu > Save Graphics  
Remot e  
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage GIF | CGM  
Commands  
Save Setup  
Accesses the setup panel to configure the save settings:  
file name (create a file name automatically or manually)  
network file path  
network file share  
save (all measurement data or trace data only)  
save graphics (save graphics and the graphic format)  
save to (save to a floppy disk or to the internal drive)  
save traces (select trace(s) to save)  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Save Setup  
The Save Setup panel  
Setup Panel  
Select ions  
File Na me  
Selects manual or automatic mode for choosing a file name.  
The Filename Menu setup panel  
Networ k File Pa th  
Uses the LAN (local area network) to print to designated, network printers.  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Save Setup  
No t e  
To access the file and printer share softkeys, you must first configure the  
network and enter the user share identity/user profile information for remote  
shares. The softkeys for file and printer share will then become available for  
selection.  
Networ k File Sha r e  
Uses the LAN (local area network) to store, recall, or delete data to remote  
hard drives. The data can then be accessed and shared among the users and  
printed on designated, network printers.  
No t e  
To access the file and printer share softkeys, you must first configure the  
network and enter the user share identity/user profile information for remote  
shares. The softkeys for file and printer share will then become available for  
selection.  
Sa ve  
Saves the measurement data in a binary format (.dat file). This includes the  
traces and all measurement conditions. When the file is recalled, the instru-  
ment state will be set to the same state as when the file was saved. The  
Trace(s) Only option creates an ASCII (.csv) file. When the file is recalled, the  
trace data will be displayed under the current instrument settings.  
Sa ve Gr a phics  
Allows you to save graphic data in one of two formats.  
CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile format), is a vector graphics format that  
describes pictures and graphical elements in geometric terms. The file is  
saved with a .cgm extension. This selection is valid only when saving to the  
floppy drive.  
GIF (Graphics Interchange format), is a cross-platform graphic standard.  
GIF formats are commonly used on many different platforms and readable  
by many different kinds of software. The file is saved with a .gif extension.  
GIF supports up to 8-bit color (256 colors).  
Sa ve to  
Selects saving data to a floppy disk or to internal memory.  
Sa ve Tra ces  
Selects the traces to be saved.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Function Reference  
Save/Recall  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Save Menu  
Remot e  
(Graphics format) HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage  
Commands  
(Measurement) *SAV  
(Trace only) MMEMory:STORe:TRACe  
(Network File Share)MMEMory:FSHAre [1|2|3|4][:PATH] <param>  
(Network File Share)MMEMory:FSHAre [1|2|3|4][:ADDRess] <param>  
(Network File Path)HCOPy:DEVice:PSHare[1|2|3|4][:PATH] <param>  
(Network File Path)HCOPy:DEVice:PSHare[1|2|3|4]:ADDRess <param>  
(Network File Path)HCOPy:DESTinationSYSTem:COMMunicate:NET-  
Work[1|2|3|4]  
Save/Recall  
Accesses function keys to save and recall measurement results. See Saving,  
Recalling, and Managing Fileson page 2-19  
backup/restore menu  
delete menu  
fast measure recall  
fast measure save  
format floppy disk  
recall menu  
save menu  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall  
Save To (Save Setup Panel)  
Selects saving data to a floppy disk or to internal memory.  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Save Menu > Save To  
Remot e  
*SAV FLOPpy | INTernal  
Commands  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Save Traces (Save Setup Panel)  
Save Traces (Save Setup Panel)  
Selects the traces to be saved. Select Save Traces and then select the individ-  
ual trace(s) or all the current trace data. See Saving Measurement and Trace  
Dataon page 2-20  
Key Pat h  
Save/Recall > Save Menu > Save Traces  
Remot e  
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe  
Commands  
Scale/Div  
Specifies the dB per division of the vertical (that is, amplitude) scale. If Auto  
is specified in the Auto Measure Setup panel, the measurement function sets  
the vertical scale based on the dynamic range of the signal. If a particular ver-  
tical scale is desired, use the step keys or key pad to enter the desired dB/div  
in the dB dialog box. The amplitude scale can be set from 0.01 to 20 dB per  
division. The Preset value is 10 dB per division.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Scale/Div  
Related Functions  
Display Mode Log Linear, Reference Level  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:PDIVision  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Search Limit On/Off  
Search Limit On/Off  
When the search limit function is on, all the marker peak/pit searches will  
apply only to the range specified by the two wavelength line markers.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu > Advanced Line  
Mkr Functions > Search Limit On/Off  
Remot e  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:SRANge:STATe  
Commands  
Search Mode Peak/Pit  
Allows you to select between peak and pit search modes. The selection on the  
marker search menu will change depending on which of the two modes is  
selected.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Marker Search Menu > Search Mode  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MAXimum  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]:MINimum  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Select Path INT/EXT  
Select Path INT/EXT  
For 86144B/86146B only.  
Allows you to select between internal (50 µm) and external (9 µm) fiber. The  
dual fiber outputs from the monochromator allow the instrument to have  
improved resolution bandwidth and dynamic range when using the 9 µm fiber.  
The 50 µm fiber is the default setting.  
Int ernal ( 50 µm) path resolution bandwidth include: 0.06, 0.1, 0.14, 0.2,  
0.33, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 settings  
External ( 9 µm) path resolution bandwidth include: 0.04, 0.06, 0.1, 0.14,  
0.2, 0.33, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 settings  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > Select Path  
Remot e  
INSTrument:SELect FILTER”  
Commands  
Sensitivity  
Requests the lowest amplitude signal that can be measured relative to the  
power at top of screen. It is defined as the signal that is six times the RMS  
noise. The minimum setting is 100 dB. An error will be reported for values  
outside of this range and the sensitivity will round to the nearest valid sensitiv-  
ity. See Setting the Sensitivityon page 2-9  
Manual allows manual input of sensitivities and enables auto gain ranging.  
The top of screenand the sensitivity setting determines the requested  
dynamic range. The system will sweep once per gain stage and may require up  
to three sweeps to achieve the requested dynamic range.  
Aut o automatically chooses a sensitivity and a single gain range based on top  
of screen. This will result in approximately 40 dB of dynamic range.  
The sweep time (ST) that is displayed in the lower portion of the display is the  
time for the OSA to sweep over one gain stage. The OSA may take up to three  
sweeps in three different gain stages to make the measurement. This depends  
on the settings for sensitivity, reference level, auto range and also the particu-  
lar device being measured. The final data trace is a blended composite of each  
trace taken in the different gain stages. For more information refer to Setting  
the Sensitivityon page 2-9.  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Set Time/Date  
An increase in sensitivity may also require a narrower video bandwidth, which  
will slow the sweep speed. Normally, the optical spectrum analyzer selects the  
greatest sensitivity possible that does not require amplification changes dur-  
ing the sweep. If you manually increase the sensitivity level, the sweep pauses  
to allow this change in gain.  
The settings for sensitivity, video bandwidth and sweep time interact. If the  
sensitivity is set to manual, the video bandwidth and sweep time may be  
forced to Auto mode. If the video bandwidth is set to manual, the sensitivity  
and sweep time may be forced to Auto. If the sweep speed is set to manual  
and is set too fast, the over sweep indicator will come on in the display area.  
Since these settings interact, it is recommended that only one of the settings  
be changed, whichever setting is most important to the measurement task  
being performed.  
Key Pat h  
Amplitude > Sensitivity  
Related Functions  
Amplitude Setup (Auto Ranging), Reference Level  
Remot e  
Commands  
(Automatic) SENSe: POWer:DC:RANGe:LOWer:AUTO  
(Manual) SENSe: POWer:DC:RANGe:LOWer  
Set Time/Date  
Accesses the time/date setup panel. The selections are current time (24-hour  
format), current date, and time zone. To make changes:  
use the navigation keys to select the dialog box  
use the numeric entry keys to change the time and date  
use the step keys to change the time zone and month  
press Set Time/Date when the desired changes are completed  
Changing the time, date, or time zone causes the instrument to reboot with  
the current information.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Set Time/Date  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Set Title  
Set Title  
Accesses the Title Setup panel to add a title to the display. Use the softkeys to  
change or select the items from the setup panel. Refer to Adding a Title to  
the Displayon page 2-19  
Key Pat h  
System > Set Title  
Remot e  
DISPlay[:WINDow[1]]:TEXT:DATA  
Commands  
Show Critical Errors  
Opens a window displaying critical errors. You can print the queue, clear the  
queue, or page up and down to view the information. If no errors are gener-  
ated, the function will be shaded.  
Key Pat h  
System > Help > Show Critical Errors  
Show Hardware Errors, Show Notices, Show Warnings, or Revision  
SYSTem:ERRor?  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Show HW Errors  
Show HW Errors  
Opens a window displaying hardware errors. You can print the queue, clear  
the queue, or page up and down to view the information. If no errors are gen-  
erated, the function will be shaded.  
Key Pat h  
System > Help > Show HW Errors  
Related Functions  
Show Critical Errors, Show Notices, Show Warnings, or Revision  
SYSTem:ERRor?  
Remot e  
Commands  
Show Notices  
Opens a window displaying notices. You can print the queue, clear the queue,  
or page up and down to view the information. If no notices are generated, the  
function will be shaded.  
Key Pat h  
System > Help > Show Notices  
Related Functions  
Show Hardware Errors, Show Critical Errors, Show Warnings, or Revision  
SYSTem:ERRor?  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Show Warnings  
Show Warnings  
Opens a window displaying warnings. You can print the queue, clear the  
queue, or page up and down to view the information. If no warnings are gener-  
ated, the function will be shaded.  
Key Pat h  
System > Help > Show Warnings  
Related Functions  
Show Hardware Errors, Show Critical Errors, Show Notices, or Revision  
SYSTem:ERRor?  
Remot e  
Commands  
Single Mode Alignment  
For 86141B only  
Performs an auto align on the external signal path. The external path from the  
monochromator output to the photo diode input must be connected before  
performing the auto align.  
When Single Mode Alignment is selected, follow the on-screen instructions in  
the setup panel.  
The Single Mode Fiber Alignment Setup panel  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Single Mode Align  
CALibration:ALIGnment  
Key Pat h  
Related Functions  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Single Sweep  
Remot e  
INSTrument:SELect  
Commands  
Single Sweep  
Initiates one sweep of the measurement range. Use this function to update the  
displayed measurement data. Refer to Repeat Sweepon page 3-71  
Trigger conditions must be met in order for a single sweep to occur. The  
SWEEP indicator light on the front panel is on when the sweep is in progress.  
The indicator is off when the sweep is complete.  
Tip: Single sweep mode is especially useful when programming the instru-  
ment and under the following circumstances:  
insuring the trace reflects current measurement range settings  
capturing traces before processing them with math commands  
capturing traces before positioning markers  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > Single Sweep  
Repeat Sweep  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
INITiate:IMMediate  
Commands  
Span  
Defines the wavelength measurement range for viewing the spectrum.  
The span is set symmetrically about the center wavelength. The resolution of  
the wavelength readout decreases with an increase in the span setting. When  
the span is set to 0, the displays horizontal axis represents time instead of  
wavelength. A span of 0 (called zero span mode) configures the instrument as  
a fixed tuned receiver. Refer to Using Span to Zoom Inon page 2-8  
No t e  
Zero span mode requires that sensitivity be in Auto mode.  
The wavelength measurement range can also be set using the Start WL and  
Stop WL functions.  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Start WL  
If you increase the span around a center wavelength beyond one of the end  
wavelength limits, the center wavelength will change to a value that will allow  
the span to increase. For example, if the center wavelength is set to 1680 nm  
and you increase the span to 100 nm, the center wavelength changes to 1650  
nm in order to be able to accommodate the 100 nm span.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Span  
Related Functions  
Start WL, Stop WL, Center WL  
SENSe:WAVelength:SPAN  
Remot e  
Commands  
Start WL  
Sets the start wavelength. The center wavelength and span are adjusted so  
that:  
Span  
Start = Center ------------  
2
Use the knob, step keys, or numeric keys to enter the desired value.  
If the instrument is in zero span, this command sets the center wavelength to  
the value specified.  
The default setting for start wavelength is 600 nm.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Start WL  
Related Functions  
Span, Stop WL, Center WL  
Remot e  
SENSe:WAVelength:STARt  
Commands  
Stop WL  
Specifies the stop wavelength. The center wavelength and span are adjusted  
so that:  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Sweep Points  
Span  
Stop = Center + ------------  
2
Use the knob, step keys, or numeric keys to enter the desired value.  
If the instrument is in zero span, this command sets the center wavelength to  
the value specified.  
The default for stop wavelength is 1700 nm.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Stop WL  
Related Functions  
Span, Start WL, Center WL  
Remot e  
SENSe:WAVelength:STOP  
Commands  
Sweep Points  
Specifies the number of data points taken for a sweep. The more data points  
the better the trace resolution, but the longer the sweep time. You can select  
from 3 to 10001 points. Enter the number of data points using the step keys,  
numeric key pad, or knob. The default is 1001 points.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Setup > Sweep Points  
SENSe:SWEep:POINts  
Remot e  
Commands  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Sweep Time  
Sweep Time  
Specifies the amount of time required for the instrument to sweep the current  
measurement range. The instrument automatically selects sweep times based  
on coupling of the following instrument settings:  
wavelength span  
resolution bandwidth  
video bandwidth  
sensitivity  
trace length  
power level  
Coupling of these parameters yields optimum amplitude accuracy. When  
Sweep Time is set to Auto, the instrument always uses the fastest sweep pos-  
sible while still maintaining the specified accuracy. Coupled, sweep times  
range from 56.3 mn to a maximum value that depends on the number of trace  
points used to draw the trace. This relationship is shown in the following equa-  
tion:  
sweep time  
56.3ms ≤  
≤(1min)(  
)
trace points  
The default number of trace points is 1001, so the maximum sweep time is  
normally 100 seconds. When Sweep Time is in manual mode, the sweep time  
can be set from 56.3 ms to a maximum of 1000 seconds. If you change the  
number of trace points, the maximum sweep time changes as well.  
No t e  
If the sweep time is set too fast, an over sweep message appears indicating the  
display is no longer calibrated and that trace data may not meet specifications.  
Increase the sweep time until the over sweep message disappears. If the sweep  
time is set too slow, measurement times may be excessively long.  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > Sweep Time  
Related Functions  
wavelength span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sensitivity, trace  
length, power level  
Remot e  
Commands  
SENSe:SWEep:TIME:AUTO  
SENSe:SWEep:TIME  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Switch Path Auto Align Now  
Switch Path Auto Align Now  
For 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only.  
Switches to the 9 µm filter mode path and performs an Auto Align. To ensure  
maximum amplitude accuracy, connect the 9 µm fiber between the monochro-  
mator output and the photodetector input and then press Switch Path Auto  
Align Now. This aligns the output of the monochromator with the photodetec-  
tor input for improved amplitude accuracy. The automatic alignment proce-  
dure should be performed whenever the instrument has been:  
moved  
subjected to temperature changes > 2° C  
turned off and warmed up for an hour at the start of each day  
The automatic alignment requires the connection of an external light source.  
This can be a broadband or narrowband source. If there is insufficient signal  
power, the automatic alignment will not be performed and an error message  
will be reported.  
The auto align function saves and restores the current instrument state. This  
allows the auto align function to be used in the middle of a measurement rou-  
tine.  
If markers are turned on, the auto align function attempts to do the automatic  
alignment at the wavelength of the active marker. If the instrument is in zero  
span, the alignment is performed at the center wavelength.  
No t e  
The auto align now will overwrite any previous align data. To preserve current  
auto align data, select Switch Path No Auto Align.  
The data returned by the alignment is stored in both the 9 µm and the 50 µm  
table. With the data stored on both tables, the centering for the 50 µm path is  
improved due to the increased resolution bandwidth of the 9 µm path. Once  
the align is complete or if you select No Auto Align, the instrument will be  
ready to detect data via the 50 µm path.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Switch Path Auto Align Now  
Related Functions  
Switch Path No Auto Align  
Remot e  
Commands  
ROUTe:PATH:EXTernal  
CALibration:ALIGn:FILTer  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Switch Path No Auto Align  
Switch Path No Auto Align  
For 86144B/86146B Filter Mode only.  
Selects the 9 µm filter mode path. You should select this function if the instru-  
ment has not be moved, subjected to temperature changes >2° C, turned off  
and warmed up for at least an hour at the start of each day or to preserve pre-  
vious align data.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Switch Path Auto Align Now  
Switch Path Auto Align Now  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
ROUTe:PATH:EXTernal  
Commands  
System  
Accesses menus for changing, displaying, selecting, and viewing the instru-  
ments functions. Some of the functions available are:  
shows HW and critical errors, warnings and notices  
sets a title to the display  
displays the firmware revision  
sets printer setup  
moves the active function area  
displays the instrument state information  
changes the display setup  
changes the time and dates  
selects the power-on state  
performs a factory preset  
upgrades the firmware  
zeros the instrument  
sets the wavelength limit  
sets the TransZ 2-3 lock  
changes the auto measure defaults  
sets the GPIB address  
sets networking parameters  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Take Sweep  
For 86141B/86144B/86146B Filter Mode only.  
Initiates a single sweep that updates the display to show the valid waveform  
data. Refer to Repeat Sweepon page 3-71 and to Single Sweepon  
page 3-86.  
Key Pat h  
Appls > Measurement Modes > Filter Mode > Switch Path Auto Align Now  
> Take Sweep  
Related Functions  
Single Sweep  
Remot e  
INITiate:IMMediate  
Commands  
Turns the display title on or off. When the title selection is on, the title will  
appear on the displays top, center of the graticule, and on printouts. Create a  
title in the Title Setup panel (System > Set Title). Use the arrows, step keys,  
or knob to select the letters for the title. See Adding a Title to the Displayon  
page 2-19.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Display Setup  
DISPlay:WINDow:TEXT:DATA  
Remot e  
Commands  
Trace Averaging  
When averaging is on, you can select the number of measurement sweeps to  
be averaged, using the 10, 20, 50, 100 softkeys. You can also enter averaging  
values other than those displayed by using the numeric keypad or the knob.  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Trace C Math Off  
When the number of sweeps taken is less than the count, the following for-  
mula is used to calculate the data:  
sum of current sweeps  
AVG = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
n u mber of averages selected  
If the number of sweeps is greater than or equal to the count, the following  
formula is used to calculate the data:  
æ
ç
è
new measurement ö  
+ ----------------------------------------------------  
last average  
count 1  
= ----------------------- ×  
count  
÷
ø
New average  
count  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Averaging  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage:COUNt  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:AVERage:STATe  
Trace C Math Off  
Turns off Trace C math processing.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off > Default Math Trace C > Trace C Math Off  
CALCulate3:MATH:STATe  
Remot e  
Commands  
Trace F Math Off  
Turns off Trace F math processing.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off > Default Math Trace F > Trace F Math Off  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate6:MATH:STATe  
CALCulate6:MATH:EXPRession:DEFine  
TRACe:EXCHange  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Trace Integ  
Trace Integ  
Calculates total power. Total power is the summation of the power at each  
trace point, normalized by the ratio of the trace point spacing and the resolu-  
tion bandwidth. The analyzer can only calculate the total power of single  
trace. For example, if a total power calculation is being performed on trace A,  
turning total power calculation for trace B will turn the calculation for trace A  
off.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu > Advanced Line  
Mkr Functions > Trace Integ  
Related Functions  
Integrate Limit, Sweep Limit, Search Limit  
CALCulate:TPOWer:STATe  
Remot e  
Commands  
Trace Math  
Accesses the menu that allows you to manipulate and compare traces by add-  
ing or subtracting trace-amplitude and display-line data. Trace Math charac-  
terizes changes due to environmental stimulus and displays the cumulative  
effect of multiple devices. When using trace math, the traces must be obtained  
using identical wavelength, scale and amplitude values. Any difference in ref-  
erence level, amplitude units-per-division, or amplitude units invalidates any  
data resulting from trace math. See Using Trace Math to Measure Wavelength  
Drifton page 2-29  
The following functions can be accessed:  
All Math Off  
Default Math Trace C  
Default Math Trace F  
Exchange Menu  
Trace A Offset  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
Trace OffSet  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MATH:STATe  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MATH:EXPRession:DEFine  
TRACe:EXCHange  
Trace OffSet  
Offsets the active trace by the user-specified value.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Trace Math Off > Remote Commands  
CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:OFFSet  
Traces  
Accesses the menu that allows you to select and control traces. Some of the  
functions available are:  
active trace  
averaging  
hold trace  
trace input  
trace math  
trace setup  
update trace  
view trace  
The instrument displays up to six traces: A, B, C, D, E, and F. When the instru-  
ment is first turned on, trace A is the active trace.  
TransZ 2-3 Lock  
Prohibits the instrument from using a transimpedance gain higher than the  
10k ohm stage. The default state for transZ 2-3 lock is off.  
Key Pat h  
Systems> More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
> More Adv Service Menu > TransZ 2-3 Lock  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Trigger Mode, Internal  
Remot e  
[SENSe]:POWer:RANGe:LOCK  
Commands  
Trigger Mode, Internal  
Synchronizes the start of the sweep to an internally generated trigger signal.  
Internal triggering ensures continuously triggered sweeps with the shortest  
delay between sweeps. See Triggering a Measurementon page 2-10  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > More BW/Sweep Functions > Trigger Mode  
Remot e  
Commands  
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe  
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce  
Update A...F On|OFF  
When on, the selected trace is updated after each sweep. When off, the trace  
data is not updated.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > Update  
View A...F  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
SENSe:SWEep:POINts  
Commands  
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,ALWays  
TRACe:FEED:CONTrol TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,NEVer  
Use Marker Search Threshold On/Off (Marker Setup  
Panel)  
When on, the marker search function ignores peaks below the threshold value.  
A dotted line is shown on the display at the threshold level.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > Marker Setup > Use Marker Search Threshold  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
User Profile for Remote Shares  
Related Functions  
Pit Excursion, Peak Excursion, Marker Threshold Value  
Remot e  
CALCulate:THReshold:STATe  
Commands  
User Profile for Remote Shares  
Accesses the username, password, and workgroup fields for access to your  
network. Use the alphanumeric pad to complete the information. After enter-  
ing the information, the file shares and printer shares softkeys will become  
available.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > User Share  
Identity > User Profile for Remote Shares  
Related Functions  
Printer Share  
Remot e  
Commands  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:USERname <param>  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:PASSword <param>  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:WORKgroup <param>  
User Share Identity  
Opens a panel to fill-in username, password, and domain. Use the alphanu-  
meric pad to complete the information. After entering the information, the file  
shares and printer shares softkeys will become available.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > GPIB & Network Setup > User Share  
Identity  
Related Functions  
File Share, Printer Share  
Remot e  
Commands  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:USERname <param>  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:PASSword <param>  
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:WORKgroup <param>  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
User Source Multi-Pt Align  
User Source Multi-Pt Align  
Adjusts the mechanical position of the instruments internal optical compo-  
nents ensuring amplitude accuracy of your measurements. This function is  
semi-automatic and aligns equally spaced points within the span and builds  
the current fiber trajectory table. See Multi-Point Alignon page 3-46  
Connect an external broadband source to the input connector of the instru-  
ment. Then set the instrument to the desired values:  
start and stop wavelengths (input range 600 nm to 1700 nm)  
span  
>3 nm for the external path (Agilent 86144B/86146B only)  
>25 nm for the internal path  
reference level (must be greater than 78 dBm in a 10 nm resolution bandwidth  
at all points to be aligned)  
The instrument auto aligns at equally spaced points within the span and builds  
the fiber trajectory table (maximum of 32 points). To add or adjust a single  
point in the trajectory table, move the active marker to the specific wave-  
length location and press Auto Align & Add to Trajectory. The Multi-Pt Auto  
Align progress window opens indicating the percentage of completion and the  
approximate time required for the alignment process. To cancel the align,  
press the instrument preset key. This table is interpolated to create a linear  
set of corrections.  
If Auto Align is executed after User Source Multi-Pt Align, all of the alignment  
tracking data will be shifted. In this sense, auto align is done on top of this  
alignment.  
No t e  
Error 5056, Trajectory align cannot find input signal, will occur if a broadband  
light source is not connected to the front-panel input connector.  
Error 5057, Invalid settings for trajectory align, will occur if the start and/or  
stop wavelength settings are invalid.  
Error 5060, Trajectory align failed, will occur if the align procedure failed.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
> More Adv Service Menu > Multi-Point Align > User Source Multi-Pt Align  
Related Functions  
Auto Align & Add To Trajectory  
Auto Align Preset  
Calibrator Multi-Pt Align  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Reference  
User Wavelength Cal Date  
Remot e  
CALibration:ALIGn:EXTernal  
Commands  
User Wavelength Cal Date  
Shows the date and time of the last successful user-performed wavelength cal-  
ibration.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Wavelength Setup > User Wavelength Cal Date  
Wavelength Calibration  
Related Functions  
Video BW  
Specifies the bandwidth of the post-detection video filter. Filtering occurs  
after the detection of the light. The minimum value for video bandwidth is 0  
Hz. The maximum value is the lesser value of either 3 kHz or the bandwidth of  
the currently selected transimpedance amplifier. In the auto coupled mode,  
the video bandwidth has an extremely wide range. This allows the optical  
spectrum analyzer to avoid unnecessary filtering that would reduce the sweep  
speed more than required. See Setting Video Bandwidthon page 2-7  
Normally, the video bandwidth is coupled to the requested sensitivity. Manu-  
ally entering a video bandwidth sets Sensitivity to Auto. The video bandwidth  
can be manually set from 100 mHz to 3 kHz, or the bandwidth of the currently  
selected transimpedance amplifier, whichever is less.  
The following functions affect video bandwidth:  
changing the sensitivity value  
changing the reference level  
turning auto ranging on or off  
The range of video bandwidths available in auto mode is much greater than  
can be set manually from the front panel. A lower video bandwidth value  
requires a longer sweep time. Because of the interdependence between the  
video bandwidth and sensitivity, it is recommended that either the sensitivity  
or the video bandwidth be changed, whichever is the most important to the  
measurement task being performed.  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
View (trace)  
Key Pat h  
Bandwidth/Sweep > Video BW  
Sensitivity  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
Commands  
[SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO  
[SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo  
View (trace)  
Allows trace A, B, C, D, E, or F data to be viewed. Viewed traces are not  
updated as sweeps occur unless the Update function is on.  
Key Pat h  
Traces > View  
Related Functions  
Active Trace, Update  
Remot e  
DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe TRA|TRB|TRC|TRD|TRE|TRF,ON  
Commands  
Wavelength  
Accesses a menu to set:  
center wavelength  
peak to center  
span  
start wavelength  
stop wavelength  
wavelength setup  
Wavelength Cal Info  
Displays the date of the last factory calibration, the last user wavelength cali-  
bration date, signal source, wavelengths referenced in, and set calibration  
wavelength.  
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Function Reference  
Wavelength Cal Setup  
Key Pat h  
System > Calibration > Wavelength Cal Setup  
Wavelength > Calibration  
Related Functions  
Remot e  
CALibrate:WAVelength:DATE?  
Commands  
Wavelength Cal Setup  
See Calibrating Wavelength Measurementson page 2-14. Accesses the fol-  
lowing:  
calibration data will be offset or replaced  
factory wavelength calibration date  
set calibration wavelength  
signal source external or calibrator  
user wavelength cal date  
wavelength referenced in air or vacuum  
The Wavelength Calibration setup panel  
Setup Panel  
Select ions  
Fa ctor y Wa velength Ca l Da te  
Shows the date of the last factory-performed wavelength calibration.  
User Wa velength Ca l Da te  
Shows the date of the last successful user-performed wavelength calibration.  
3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Function Reference  
Wavelength Line Mkr 1/2  
Signa l Sour ce  
Selects either an external single wavelength signal source or the internal cali-  
brator as the wavelength calibration source.  
Wa velength Referenced In (for externa l ca libra tion source only)  
Selects air or vacuum for the calibration. If the internal calibrator is selected,  
this selection will not be available.  
Set Ca libr a tion Wa velength (for exter na l ca libr a tion source only)  
This is the exact wavelength of the calibration source that will be used for the  
next user wavelength calibration. The wavelength entered must be within  
2.5 nm of the wavelength measured using the factory calibration. If the inter-  
nal calibrator is selected, this selection will not be available.  
User Multipoint Wa velength Ca libra tion Da ta  
Selects either Offset or Replaced for the calibration data. Offset will adjust the  
user multipoint data at all wavelengths to provide the best wavelength accu-  
racy at the calibration source wavelength.  
Replaced will disable the multipoint data when used with an external source  
(select Offset to re-enable).  
Replaced will delete multipoint data when used with the internal calibrator.  
Key Pat h  
System > Calibration > Wavelength Cal Setup  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALibrate:WAVelength:STATe ON  
CALibrate:WAVelength:STATe OFF  
CALibrate:WAVelength:INTernal  
Wavelength Line Mkr 1/2  
Allows you to set the positions of the line markers. Wavelength Line Mkr 1 is  
always to the left of Wavelength Line Mkr 2. When either one of the line mark-  
ers is accessed, the reduced section of the wavelength is highlighted in blue.  
The line marker can then be set to the desired position using the knob, step  
keys, or numeric keypad. This limits the measurement range of the sweep  
limit, search limit, and integrated power.  
Key Pat h  
Markers > More Marker Functions > Line Marker Menu > Wavelength Line  
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function Reference  
Wavelength Offset  
Mkr 1| 2  
Remot e  
Commands  
(Wavelength Line Marker 1):CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]  
:SRANge:LOWer  
(Wavelength Line Marker 2):CALCulate[1|2|3|4|5|6]:MARKer[1|2|3|4]  
:SRANge:UPPer  
(Sweep Limit):SENSe:WAVelength:SRANge:UPPer  
Wavelength Offset  
Specifies the wavelength offset. This is an offset between the measured wave-  
length and the displayed wavelength. You can calibrate the TLS with a wave  
meter and correct for any offset. Entering a value in the wavelength offset has  
no affect on the trace.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Wavelength Setup > Wavelength Offset  
SENSe:WAVelength:OFFSet  
Remot e  
Commands  
Wavelength Setup  
Accesses the Wavelength Setup panel:  
center wavelength step size  
user wavelength calibration date  
wavelength calibration  
wavelength offset  
wavelengths referenced in  
wavelength units  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Wavelength Setup  
Remot e  
Commands  
CALibrate:WAVelength:STATe ON  
CALibrate:WAVelength:STATe OFF  
SENSe:WAVelength:OFFSet  
SENSe:WAVelength:CENTer:STEP:INCRement  
3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Reference  
Wavelength Units  
Wavelength Units  
Sets the display wavelength units to nm, µm, or Ang.  
Angtrom (Ang) is a unit of measurement of wavelength of light and other radi-  
ation equal to one ten-thousandth of a micron or one hundred-millionth of a  
centimeter.  
Key Pat h  
Wavelength > Wavelength Setup > Wavelength Units  
Zero Now  
Causes the auto zero function to run immediately. This allows you to manually  
zero the instrument when the auto zero function is off.  
In Auto Zero mode, the instrument compensates for temperature-related cur-  
rent drift between each sweep. Although this zeroingincreases amplitude  
accuracy, it also increases the time between sweeps. If amplitude accuracy is  
not critical to your measurement, turn off zeroing to improve throughput.  
The instrument performs a more complete zeroing when the instrument is  
first turned on. You can run this more complete routine anytime by pressing  
the Zero Now softkey.  
Key Pat h  
System > More System Functions > Service Menu > Adv Service Functions  
> Zero Now  
Remot e  
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO ONCE  
Commands  
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
page 4-2  
Setting Up the OSA for Remote Operationon page 4-4  
Connecting to the OSA over the Networkon page 4-6  
Using the Reflection X Emulator to Run the Remote Front Panelon page 4-7  
Using the X Win 32 Emulator to Run the Remote Front Panelon page 4-9  
Using a UNIX Workstation to Run the Remote Front Panelon page 4-12  
Using the Remote Front Panelon page 4-15  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Remote Front Panel  
The Remote Front Panel capability provides a means to allow the front panel  
of the OSA to be operated remotely from a PC with an X Windowing emulator  
or a UNIX workstation with X Windows.  
With the exception for update time, which is limited by the speed of the  
underlying network, there should be no visible difference between what would  
be displayed on the OSA locally and the remote display.  
Information and Equipment Required for the Configura-  
tion Process  
1 Before beginning the OSA network configuration process, obtain the following  
required information from your Information Technology (IT) department.  
In the OSA network configuration process, an IP address and the associated  
hostname need to be assigned to the OSA and added to the DNS utilized by  
your PC or UNIX workstation. Gateway and Net Mask information will also need  
to be specified in order for the OSA to communicate with the LAN.  
The new Internet Protocol ( IP) address is used to uniquely identify the  
network address of the OSA. An IP address is a set of four decimal numbers,  
separated by periods, like 192.170.128.210.  
The Host name associated with the IP address or the OSA.  
Net Mask ( Subnet work Mask) # is used to let the Internet Protocol separate  
the network ID from the full IP address and thus determine whether the source  
and destination IP address are on the same network.  
Gateway address is used to communicate with devices on a different physical  
network. The gateway address is the address of a routing device that connects  
your OSAs LAN with other LANs. In some cases, this may be the same address  
as the IP address of the OSA client.  
Local Domain Name is used to identify the name of the unique internet  
address stating the location and company name.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Domain Name System ( DNS) Server IP Address is used to uniquely iden-  
tify the location of a particular server. An IP address is a set of four decimal  
numbers, separated by periods, like 192.170.130.215.  
Worksheet for your IT depa rtment  
Internet Protocol (IP) address:________________________________________  
Host Name associated with the IP address:______________________________  
Net Mask (Subnetwork Mask)#:_______________________________________  
Gateway address:___________________________________________________  
Domain Name System (DNS):_________________________________________  
Local Domain Name: ________________________________________________  
Domain Name System (DNS) Server IP Address:_________________________  
The Network Configuration procedure does not require the NIS configuration.  
Your PC or UNIX workstation will use the DNS to lookup the OSA location by  
the host name. Any NIS information entered will not be used in configuring  
the OSA network for Remote Front Panel operation.  
2 A keyboard and mouse must be attached to the OSA to complete the  
procedure. Restart the OSA after connecting the keyboard and mouse.  
3 Before using the remote front panel, the OSA must be connected to the local  
area network (LAN). There must be no Proxies between the OSA and the  
remote system. Continuous, normal operation of the OSA is dependent on the  
speed of the underlying network.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Setting Up the OSA for Remote Operation  
1 From the OSAs front panel, press Syst em > More System Funct ions >  
GPIB & Net work Set up > Configure Network.  
2 When the Network Configuration screen is displayed, press Continue.  
The OSA will now restart the operating system and load the Network Configure  
utility.  
3 From the Network Configure Utility window, press OK.  
4 When the Network Configure window opens, press Configure.  
During the configuration process, you will be prompted to enter each of the  
networking parameters as described below. If networking is currently config-  
ured, you have the option of accepting the current configuration or updating  
the networking parameters.  
Tip: This is where you can verify the current network settings.  
Pressing Unconfig will disable the current network configuration, if any.  
5 The HP-UX Set Systems Parameters panel is displayed. You will use this panel  
to supply the information needed to configure the OSA on the network. Press  
Yes to continue.  
6 The Required Information window will open. You need to obtain the name of  
your system (hostname) and your Internet Protocol (IP) address information  
from your local network administrator before proceeding. Press Yes,  
Continue if you have the necessary information.  
7 Enter the Hostname for your OSA, then press OK.  
8 Press Yes to confirm the hostname.  
9 You will now be prompted to enter the time zone settings for the OSA. It is  
important that the OSA time and time zone are consistent with the network  
where it resides.  
10 Select the Time Zone region in which the OSA resides, then press OK.  
11 Select the time and date for the OSA time zone and press OK. Press Yes to  
confirm the correct time zone or press No if the information is not correct.  
12 A window is displayed showing the current time and date of the time zone  
selected, press Yes if correct, or No to make corrections.  
13 In the System Internet Address panel, enter the Internet Address then press  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
OK. Press Yes if the address is correct.  
14 When prompted to enter additional network parameters, press Yes.  
15 Enter the Subnetwork Mask and Gateway IP Address then press OK. If the  
parameters are correct, press Yes.  
16 Enter the Domain Name Syst em and DNS Server IP Address then press  
OK. If the parameters are correct, press Yes.  
17 Press Close when the Register Node with Name Server window opens.  
18 When prompted for the NIS Domain Name and NIS Server Name, press  
Cancel. This is not required for this application.  
19 Press Done when the Network Configure window opens.  
20 The Net working Configure Ut ilit y window will open. Check the entered  
information. If all the information is correct, press OK or PRESS BACK to  
return to the network configuration menu. The OSA will restart, taking  
approximately five minutes.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Connecting to the OSA over the Network  
You can remap the OSA front panel over the network using a PC with an X  
windowing emulator or a UNIX workstation running X Windows. The following  
X windowing emulators have been tested to ensure correct OSA remote front  
panel operation.  
Reflection X revision 8.0.2  
X Win 32 revision 5.0  
UNIX with X Windows  
Refer below for specific setup instructions.  
Before using the remote front panel ensure:  
That the OSA is connected to the local area network (LAN).  
There are no Proxies between the OSA and the remote system.  
That the underlying network must operate fast enough to allow for reason-  
able operation of the OSA.  
If using a PC to run the remote front panel operation , an X Windowing  
emulator is available on the PC.  
With the exception of the power switch and knob, all front panel OSA func-  
tionality is available when using the remote front panel. You can access the  
OSA functionality via the main menu bar and make any data entries using the  
PCs keyboard.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Using the Reflection X Emulator to Run the Remote  
Front Panel  
Below are the basic steps for setting up the Reflection X emulator to run the  
OSA remote front panel. Refer to the Reflection X documentation for further  
information.  
1 From the PC Start menu, locate and run the Reflection X emulator.  
2 From the emulator window, enter the following information:  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
a In the Client Connection area (left side of the window), select hpux.rxc.  
b In the Method field, select Telnet.  
c In the Host Name field, select the name assigned to the OSA.  
d In the User Name field, enter osaadm.  
e In the Password field, enter osaosa1.  
f
In the Command field, you will need to modify the existing command as  
follows:  
(usr/bin/x11/hpterm -fn 6x13 -sb -ls -display %IP#% -name %T% -exec etc/map_display &)  
g Click Connect to start the remote front panel controller.  
3 Continue to Using the Remote Front Panelon page 4-15.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Using the X Win 32 Emulator to Run the Remote Front  
Panel  
Below are the basic steps for setting up the X Win 32 emulator to run the OSA  
remote front panel. Refer to the X Win 32 documentation for further informa-  
tion.  
1 From the PC Start menu, click X-Win32 > X Win Config.  
2 From the X-Win32 Configuration window, click Add.  
3 In the Connect Method window, select rexec and then click Next .  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
4 In the New Session enter the following information:  
a In the Session name field, enter a name to uniquely identify the OSA.  
No t e  
An advantage when using the X Win 32 emulator is that you can run multiple X  
applications on your desktop in separate windows. For this reason, it is  
recommended that you name the session after the host system you want to  
connect to in order to easily identify it when selecting it from a list of sessions.  
b In the Host Name field, enter the host name assigned to the OSA. The host  
name can either be the name or IP address of the remote host you want to  
connect to (for example, osa.osanet.com or 247.109.121.43).  
c In the Login name field, enter osaadm.  
d In the Command field, you will need to enter the command as  
follows:  
/usr/dt/bin/hpterm -display 141.121.12.345:0.0 -exec etc/map_display  
where: 141.121.12.345 is the IP address for the PC that you are using now.  
Commands are script files executed on the remote host that open X applica-  
tions on the PC.  
e In the Password field, enter osaosa1.  
f
Click Save and then OK to save the newly defined session.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
5 From the PC, St art menu, click X-Win 32 > X Win 32.  
You will notice that an X icon will appear in your windows tray -- usually  
located in the lower right-hand part of your display.  
6 Click on the X icon and select the desired OSA session to run the remote front  
panel operation.  
7 Continue to Using the Remote Front Panelon page 4-15.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Using a UNIX Workstation to Run the Remote Front  
Panel  
In order to access the remote front panel from your UNIX workstation, the X  
server must be set up to allow connection to the OSA. xhost is the service  
access control program which allows this access for X Windows.  
The xhost program is used to add and delete host names to the list allowed to  
make connections to the X server. This provides a rudimentary form of privacy  
control and security.  
1 From the command prompt type, xhost + host name. Where hostname is the  
host name assigned to the OSA.  
2 From the command prompt type, t elnet host name and then press Ent er to  
telnet to the OSA. Remember that the hostname is the name that is assigned to  
the OSA.  
3 When prompted for the login name type, osaadm and then press Ent er.  
4 When prompted for the password type, osaosa1 (or your new password if you  
have already changed it) and then press Ent er.  
5 At the prompt type, etc/map_display and then press Enter to start the  
remote front panel controller.  
6 A Welcome screen is displayed and you are given three command choices,  
Display accesses a diagnostic tool to show the display parameter setup  
Enable accesses the remote front panel. This command is used to stop the  
OSA from operating in normal mode and start operating in the Remote Front  
Panel mode. The annotation, Remote Front Panel Onwill be displayed on  
the hardware OSA display.  
Disable turns the remote front panel off. The remote front panel will close  
on the PC display and the OSA will restart and return and to normal mode.  
A fourth command (which is not displayed) is Passwd.  
Passwd allows you to change the default password to one that is unique for  
you. It is recommended that you change the default password (osaosa1) at  
this time. Simply type Passwd at the prompt and enter a new password. The  
new password must differ from the old password by at least three charac-  
ters.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
No t e  
Once you changed the password, you will need to remember it for future use.  
You will n ot be able to access the remote fron t pan el capabilities withou t  
the new password.  
7 From the command prompt, type Enable and then press Ent er.  
8 When prompted, Enter the IP number for the system where the  
display is, enter the IP address for the UNIX workstation that you are using  
now and then press Ent er.  
The remote front panel command will be displayed on the OSA and the OSA  
will be restarted. You will be able to monitor the restarting process on the PC  
display. Once the OSA has finished restarting, the front panel will be activated  
on your PC display.  
9 You can now use the remote front panel just like you would if you were sitting  
in front of the OSA. Remember to use the main menu bar to access OSA  
functions and to enter data via the keyboard number keys.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
10 When you are finished using the remote front panel, in the Map Display  
window, type Disable. The OSA will reboot into normal mode with the  
remote front panel turned off. The OSA display will close on the PC.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
Using the Remote Front Panel  
1 In the Map Display window, a Welcome screen is displayed and you are given  
three command choices,  
Display accesses a diagnostic tool to show the display parameter setup  
Enable accesses the remote front panel. This command is used to stop the  
OSA from operating in normal mode and start operating in the Remote Front  
Panel mode. The annotation, Remote Front Panel Onwill be displayed on  
the hardware OSA display.  
Disable turns the remote front panel off. The remote front panel will close  
on the PC display and the OSA will restart and return and to normal mode.  
A fourth command (which is not displayed) is Passwd.  
Passwd allows you to change the default password to one that is unique for  
you. It is recommended that you change the default password (osaosa1) at  
this time. Simply type Passwd at the prompt and enter a new password. The  
new password must differ from the old password by at least three charac-  
ters.  
No t e  
Once you changed the password, you will need to remember it for future use.  
You will n ot be able to access the remote fron t pan el capabilities withou t  
the new password.  
2 From the command prompt, type Enable. The remote front panel command  
will be displayed on the OSA and the OSA will be restarted. You will be able to  
monitor the restarting process on the PC display. Once the OSA has finished  
restarting, the front panel will be activated on your PC display.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Front Panel Operation  
Remote Front Panel  
3 You can now use the remote front panel just like you would if you were sitting  
in front of the OSA. Remember to use the main menu bar to access OSA  
functions and to enter data via the keyboard number keys.  
4 When you are finished using the remote front panel, in the Map Display  
window, type Disable. The OSA will reboot into normal mode with the  
remote front panel turned off. The OSA display will close on the PC.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Overview 5-2  
Error Reporting Behavior 5-4  
OSA Notices 5-16  
OSA Warnings 5-17  
Application-Specific Warnings 5-29  
OSA Status Errors 5-35  
OSA Errors 5-36  
Firmware Errors 5-38  
Status Listings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
Overview  
Overview  
This document describes the status listings of the Agilent 86140B series opti-  
cal spectrum analyzers. Status conditions for the optical spectrum analyzer  
are grouped into categories.  
Error  
Indicates the instrument is malfunctioning. Measurement accuracy is probably  
affected. Errors can be caused by either a hardware or a firmware problem.  
The instrument requires repair at a Agilent Technologies service center.  
St at us error  
Indicates an internal hardware function is unavailable or not operating within  
specifications. This is usually a temporary problem, such as a temperature  
control loop being unsettled. Status errors cannot be cleared by the user.  
When the condition causing the error is corrected the error will go away.  
Warning  
A warning is displayed when the optical spectrum analyzer cannot satisfy a  
request from the user. Parameter entries that are out of range, illegal or unrec-  
ognized remote commands or missing hardware options can cause a warning  
to be displayed. A warning can be displayed if a requested measurement, for  
example AutoMeasure, cannot be performed due to a missing input signal.  
UNCAL  
Not ice  
This message alerts the user the requested instrument setup can cause an  
invalid measurement. For example, manually setting the sweep time to a value  
that is too fast for other instrument settings.  
A user alert indicating something in the state of the instrument has changed.  
For example, if the user specifies a particular value for the current duty cycle,  
a notice will be displayed when the optical spectrum analyzer modifies the  
pulse width.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
Overview  
The following table lists the error numbers and their definitions.  
Number Range  
Definition  
1 to 999  
Standard SCPI errors  
OSA notices  
1000 to 2999  
3000 to 4999  
5000 to 7999  
8000 to 9999  
10000 to 11999  
12000 to 13999  
20000 to 21999  
22000 to 23999  
30000 to 32767  
Application specific notices  
OSA warnings  
Application specific warnings  
OSA status errors  
Application specific status errors  
OSA errors  
Application specific errors  
Firmware errors  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Error Reporting Behavior  
Error Reporting Behavior  
Errors are displayed in an on-screen dialog box. To continue operation, the  
user must acknowledge the error by pressing a button.  
Status errors are displayed with a descriptive line in the lower-left corner of  
the graticule. Immediately press the System key below the display, and then  
press the Help softkey to the right of the display to display more information. A  
softkey menu is displayed that includes, Show Critical Errors, Show HW Errors, Show  
Warnings, and Show Notices. If there are any errors, warnings or notices, one or  
more of these keys are enabled. Press the key to display a more complete  
description of the condition causing the message.  
Warnings and notices are displayed in a status line at the bottom of the screen.  
They are cleared when any front-panel key, other than the System key, is  
pressed, or they will clear automatically after a few seconds. To view warnings  
and notices, press the front-panel System key, the Help softkey and then the  
Show Warnings or Show Notices softkey. UNCAL is displayed as red text in the  
lower-right corner of the graticule. It is only displayed when a condition exists  
that can lead to an inaccurate measurement. There are cases when valid mea-  
surements can be made while an UNCAL condition exists, but the operator  
should use caution.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
These error messages and descriptions were copied from the SCPI 1997 Vol-  
ume 2: Command reference. The sentences enclosed in brackets [ ]are  
copied from the error descriptions in the SCPI reference. References are also  
made to IEEE 488.2 sections for further clarification of events.  
Not all the available SCPI error messages were utilized in the optical spectrum  
analyzer. Only those pertinent to the instrument were implemented.  
Note that some of the error messages do not contain descriptions or help mes-  
sages. These error numbers are reserved for future expansion. This document  
is subject to further change and development.  
Standards related information  
Further information on the Standard Commands for Programmable Instru-  
ments (SCPI) standard is available from the SCPI consortium.  
Contact:  
Fred Bode, Executive Director  
SCPI Consortium  
8380 Hercules Drive, Suite P3  
La Mesa, CA 91942  
Phone: (619) 697-8790  
FAX:  
(619) 697-5955  
CompuServe Number: 76516,254  
Fbode@vxinl.com  
For more detailed information on the IEEE 488.2 Standard, order a reference  
copy.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Contact:  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.  
345 East 47th Street  
New York, New York 10017-2394  
Phone: (800) 678-IEEE (US) 8 a.m. 4:30 p.m. (EST)  
(908) 981-1393 (International)  
Fax:  
(908) 981-9667  
Standard SCPI errors (–1 to –999)  
All positive numbers are instrument-dependent. All negative numbers are  
reserved by the SCPI standard with certain standard error/event codes  
described in this document. The value, zero, is also reserved to indicate that  
no error or event has occurred.  
Error/event numbers  
The system-defined error/event numbers are chosen on an enumerated (1 of  
N) basis. The SCPI-defined error/event numbers and the <error/event  
description> portions of the full queue item are listed here. The first error/  
event described in each class (for example, 100, 200, 300, 400) is a  
genericerror. In selecting the proper Error/event number to report, more  
specific error/event codes are preferred, and the generic error/event is used  
only if the others are inappropriate.  
Command errors  
An <error/event number> in the range [199, 100] indicates that an  
IEEE 488.2 syntax error has been detected by the instruments parser. The  
occurrence of any error in this class shall cause the command error bit (bit 5)  
in the event status register (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set.  
One of the following events has occurred:  
An IEEE 488.2 syntax error has been detected by the parser. That is, a control-  
ler-to-device message was received which is in violation of the IEEE 488.2 stan-  
dard. Possible violations include a data element which violates the device  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
listening formats or whose type is unacceptable to the device.  
An unrecognized header was received. Unrecognized headers include incorrect  
device-specific headers and incorrect or unimplemented IEEE 488.2 common  
commands.  
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was entered into the input buffer inside of an  
IEEE 488.2 <PROGRAM MESSAGE>.  
Events that generate command errors shall not generate execution errors,  
device-specific errors, or query errors; see the other error definitions in this  
chapter.  
Table 5-1. Command Errors (1 of 4)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
101  
desc = Invalid character”  
help = ““  
[A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type; for  
example, a header containing an ampersand, SETUP&. This error might be used  
in place of errors 114, 121, 141, and perhaps some others.]  
102  
103  
desc = Syntax error”  
help = ““  
[An unrecognized command or data type was encountered for example, a sting  
was received when the instrument does not accept strings.]  
desc = Invalid separator”  
help = ““  
[The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character; for  
example, the semicolon was omitted after a program message unit, *EMC  
1:CH1:VOLTS 5.]  
104  
105  
desc = Wrong Parameter Type”  
help = ““  
[The parser recognized a data element different than one allowed; for example,  
numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered.]  
desc = GET not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A Group Execute Trigger was received within a program message (see  
IEEE 488.2, 7.7).]  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Table 5-1. Command Errors (2 of 4)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
108  
desc = Parameter not allowed”  
help = ““  
[More parameters were received than expected for the header; for example,  
the *EMC common command only accepts one parameter, so receiving *EMC  
0,1 is not allowed.]  
109  
desc = Missing parameter”  
help = ““  
[Fewer parameters were received than required for the header; for example,  
the *EMC common command requires one parameter, so receiving *EMC is not  
allowed.]  
112  
113  
desc = Program mnemonic too long”  
help = ““  
[The header contains more that twelve characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.6.1.4.1).]  
desc = Undefined header”  
help = ““  
[The header is syntactically correct, but it is undefined for this specific device;  
for example, *XYZ is not defined for any device.]  
120  
desc = Numeric Data Error”  
help = “  
[This error, as well as errors 121 through 129, are generated when parsing a  
data element which appears to be numeric, including the non-decimal numeric  
types. This particular error message should be used if the device cannot detect  
a more specific error.]  
121  
123  
124  
desc = Invalid character in number”  
help = ““  
[An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered; for  
example, an alpha in a decimal numeric or a 9in octal data.]  
desc = Exponent too large”  
help = ““  
[The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 (see IEEE 488.2,  
7.7.2.4.1).]  
desc = Too many digits”  
help = ““  
[The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contained more than  
255 digits excluding leading zeros (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.2.4.1).]  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Table 5-1. Command Errors (3 of 4)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
128  
desc = Numeric data not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A legal numeric data element was received, but the device does not accept  
one in this position for the header.]  
131  
desc = Invalid suffix”  
help = ““  
The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.2, or the  
suffix is inappropriate for this device.]  
134  
138  
desc = Suffix too long”  
help = ““  
[The suffix contained more than 12 characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.4).]  
desc = Suffix not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A suffix was encountered after a numeric element which does not allow  
suffixes.]  
148  
150  
desc = Character data not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the  
device.]  
desc = String data error”  
help = ““  
[This error, as well as errors 151 through 159, are generated when parsing a  
string data element. This particular error message should be used if the device  
cannot detect a more specific error.]  
151  
158  
desc = Invalid string data”  
help = ““  
A string data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE  
488.2, 7.7.5.2); for example, an END message was received before the terminal  
quote character.]  
desc = String data not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the device at  
this point in parsing.]  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Table 5-1. Command Errors (4 of 4)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
161  
desc = Invalid block data”  
help = ““  
[A block data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE  
488.2, 7.7.6.2); for example, an END message was received before the length  
was satisfied.]  
168  
170  
desc = Block data not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the  
device at this point in parsing.]  
desc = Expression error”  
help = ““  
[This error, as well as errors 171 through 179, are generated when parsing  
an expression data element. This particular error message should be used if the  
device cannot detect a more specific error.]  
171  
178  
181  
183  
desc = Invalid expression”  
help = ““  
[The expression data element was invalid (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.7.2); for example,  
unmatched parentheses or an illegal character.]  
desc = Expression data not allowed”  
help = ““  
[A legal expression data was encountered but was not allowed by the device at  
this point in parsing.]  
desc = Invalid outside macro definition”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a macro parameter placeholder ($<number) was encountered  
outside of a macro definition.]  
desc = Invalid inside macro definition”  
help = ““  
Indicates that the program message unit sequence, sent with a *DDT or *DMC  
command, is syntactically invalid (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.6.3).]  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Execution errors  
An <error/event number> in the range [299, 200] indicates that an error has  
been detected by the instruments execution control block. The occurrence of  
any error in this class shall cause the execution error bit (bit 4) in the event  
status register (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set.  
One of the following events has occurred:  
A <PROGRAM DATA> element following a header was evaluated by the device  
as outside of its legal input range or is otherwise inconsistent with the devices  
capabilities.  
A valid program message could not be properly executed due to some device  
condition.  
Execution errors shall be reported by the device after rounding and expres-  
sion evaluation operations have taken place. Rounding a numeric data ele-  
ment, for example, shall not be reported as an execution error. Events that  
generate execution errors shall not generate Command Errors, device-specific  
errors, or Query Errors; see the other error definitions in this section.  
Table 5-2. Execution Errors (1 of 3)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
200  
desc = Execution error”  
help = ““  
[This is the generic syntax error for devices that cannot detect more specific  
errors. This code indicates only that an Execution Error as defined in IEEE 488.2,  
11.5.1.1.5 has occurred.]  
213  
221  
desc = INIT:IMM command ignored”  
help = An initiate immediate remote command was received. The instrument  
was in continuous sweep mode when the command was received. The remote  
command is ignored unless the instrument is in single sweep mode. To select  
single sweep mode use the INIT:CONT OFF command.”  
desc = Settings Conflict Error”  
help = A request was made but the instrument settings resulting from the  
request are in conflict with each other.”  
[Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be  
executed due to the current device state (see IEEE 488.2, 6.4.5.3 and 11.5.1.1.5.)]  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Table 5-2. Execution Errors (2 of 3)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
222  
desc = Data out of range”  
help = A numeric value was entered which is outside the legal range of values  
for the parameter. The name of the parameter is listed at the end of the error  
message.”  
[Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be  
executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined  
by the device (see IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5.)]  
222  
desc = Span out of range”  
help = A numeric value was entered which is outside the legal range of values  
for the span setting. This occurs if the value is too large less than zero or  
between zero and 0.2nm. Zero span may not be entered by using the DOWN  
arrow key from 0.2nm; a numeric value of zero must be entered instead.”  
[Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be  
executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined  
by the device (see IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5.)]  
223  
desc = Too much data”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a legal program data element of block, expression, or string type  
was received that contained more data than the device could handle due to  
memory or related device-specific requirements.]  
224  
257  
desc = Illegal parameter value”  
help = ““  
[Used where exact value, from a list of possibles, was expected.]  
desc = File name error”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed  
because the file name on the device media was in error; for example, an attempt  
was made to copy to a duplicate file name. The definition of what constitutes a  
file name error is device-specific.]  
272  
desc = Macro Exec Error”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be  
executed due to some error in the macro definition (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.6.3.)]  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Table 5-2. Execution Errors (3 of 3)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
273  
desc = Illegal macro label”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that the macro label defined in the *DMC command was a legal string  
syntax, but could not be accepted by the device (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.3 and  
10.7.6.2); for example, the label was too long, the same as a common command  
header, or contained invalid header  
276  
277  
desc = Macro recursion error”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be  
executed because the device found it to be recursive (see IEEE 488.2, 10.7.6.6).]  
desc = Macro redefinition not allowed”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the *DMC command could not  
be executed because the macro label was already defined (see IEEE 488.2,  
10.7.6.4).]  
278  
desc = Macro header not found”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the *GMC? query could not be  
executed because the header was not previously defined.]  
Device-specific errors  
An <error/event number> in the range [399, 300] or [1, 32767] indicates the  
instrument has detected an error which is not a command error, a query error,  
or an execution error; some device operations did not properly complete, pos-  
sibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition. These codes are  
also used for self-test response errors. The occurrence of any error in this  
class should cause the device-specific error bit (bit 3) in the event status reg-  
ister (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set. The meaning of positive error  
codes is device-dependent and may be enumerated or bit mapped; the <error  
message> string for positive error codes is not defined by SCPI and available  
to the device designer. Note that the string is not optional; if the designer does  
not wish to implement a string for a particular error, the null string should be  
sent (for example, 42,””). The occurrence of any error in this class should  
cause the device-specific error bit (bit 3) in the event status register (IEEE  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set. Events that generate device-specific errors  
shall not generate command errors, execution errors, or query errors; see the  
other error definitions in this section.  
Table 5-3. Device-Specific Errors  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
310  
desc = System error”  
help = ““  
[Indicates that some error, termed system errorby the device, has occurred.  
This code is device-dependent.]  
321  
desc = Out of memory”  
help = ““  
[An internal operation needed more memory than was available.]  
Query errors  
An <error/event number> in the range [499, 400] indicates that the output  
queue control of the instrument has detected a problem with the message  
exchange protocol described in IEEE 488.2, chapter 6. The occurrence of any  
error in this class shall cause the query error bit (bit 2) in the event status reg-  
ister (IEEE 488.2, section 11.5.1) to be set. These errors correspond to mes-  
sage exchange protocol errors described in IEEE 488.2, section 6.5.  
One of the following is true:  
An attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output  
is either present or pending.  
Data in the output queue has been lost.  
Events that generate query errors will not generate command errors, execu-  
tion errors, or device-specific errors; see the other error definitions in this sec-  
tion.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
SCPI-Defined Errors  
Table 5-4. Query Errors  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
Query error  
400  
[This is the generic query error for devices that cannot detect more specific  
errors. This code indicates only that a Query Error as defined in IEEE 488.2,  
11.5.1.1.7 and 6.3 has occurred.]  
410  
Query INTERRUPTED  
[Indicates that a condition causing an INTERRUPTED Query error occurred (see  
IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.3); for example, a query followed by DAB or GET before a  
response was completely sent.]  
420  
430  
440  
Query UNTERMINATED  
[Indicates that a condition causing an UNTERMINATED Query error occurred  
(see IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.2); for example, the device was addressed to talk and an  
incomplete program message was received.]  
Query DEADLOCKED  
[Indicates that a condition causing an DEADLOCKED Query error occurred (see  
IEEE 488.2, 6.3.1.7); for example, both input buffer and output buffer are full and  
the device cannot continue.]  
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response  
[Indicates that a query was received in the same program message after an  
query requesting an indefinite response was executed (see IEEE 488.2, 6.5.7.5).]  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Notices  
OSA Notices  
System control-related error messages or warnings  
The OSA system changed a setting and generated a warning that the opera-  
tion was performed.  
Table 5-5. System Control Errors or Warnings  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
1000  
desc = Sensitivity forced to Auto”  
help = Sensitivity has been forced to the Auto setting because another  
instrument setting was made which does not permit sensitivity to be in the  
Manual setting.”  
1001  
1002  
1003  
2999  
desc = Old Mezzanine board in system”  
help = This OSA has an old mezzanine board installed. It is not necessary to  
upgrade the mezzanine board but the software will not be able to correctly  
determine which light source options are available.”  
desc = No Delta Marker Amplitude for“  
help = The delta marker amplitude display has been turned off due to a units  
mismatch. The amplitude units of the reference marker are different than those  
of the delta marker. Values in differing units cannot be compared.”  
desc = Trace length increased”  
help = Trace length has been increased because the wavelength limit function  
was turned off. The minimum trace length is larger when the wavelength limit  
function is off and trace length was below the new minimum value.”  
desc = The Notices list has overflowed”  
help = The Notices list has overflowed. The last entries received have been  
deleted.”  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (1 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = AutoMeasure cannot find an input signal”  
5000  
help = The auto-measure procedure cannot find a usable input signal. Make  
sure you have a signal connected to the optical input. Auto-measure will not  
work with very small input signals. They must be measured manually.”  
5001  
5002  
desc = AutoAlign cannot find an input signal”  
help = The auto-align procedure cannot find a usable input signal. Make sure  
you have a signal connected to the optical input.”  
desc = Cal aborted: there is no active marker”  
help = A wavelength calibration using the wavelength of the active marker was  
requested. The calibration cannot be made because all markers are turned off.  
Place a marker on the calibration signal and try again.”  
5003  
desc = Cal aborted: trace resolution is inadequate”  
help = A wavelength calibration using the wavelength of the active marker was  
requested. The calibration cannot be done because the resolution of the  
markers trace is inadequate. Trace resolution is defined as wavelength span  
divided by (trace points 1) and must be less than 10pm. This problem can be  
corrected by one or more of the following steps:  
1. Reduce wavelength span  
2. Increase number of trace points”  
5004  
desc = Cal aborted: wavelength correction too large”  
help = A wavelength calibration was requested. The calibration was aborted  
since the correction needed is larger than 2nm. Make sure you have the correct  
index of refraction set. If the wavelength error is still this large the OSA may  
need to be serviced. The wavelength calibration function is not intended to  
apply large arbitrary offsets. Use the wavelength offset function for this  
purpose.”  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (2 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
5005  
desc = Cal aborted: amplitude correction too large”  
help = An amplitude calibration was requested. The calibration was aborted  
since the correction needed is more than +3dB or less than 10dB. Make sure  
you have done an Auto-Align prior to calibration. If the amplitude error is still  
this large the OSA may need to be serviced. The amplitude calibration function  
is not intended to apply large arbitrary offsets. Use the amplitude offset function  
for this purpose.”  
5006  
desc = Cal aborted: cannot find an input signal”  
help = The calibration procedure cannot find an input signal close enough to  
the wavelength and/or amplitude specified. Make sure the wavelength and/or  
amplitude specified for calibration are correct and verify that an input signal of  
the correct wavelength and/or amplitude is connected to the optical input.”  
5007  
5008  
desc = Calibration aborted: signal disappeared”  
help = The calibration procedure found a signal which subsequently  
disappeared. Make sure the calibration signal is connected to the optical input  
and try again.”  
desc = Calibration was not successful”  
help = The requested calibration procedure did not complete successfully.  
Verify the instrument setup and the presence of a valid calibration signal. This  
problem can sometimes be caused by removing or changing the amplitude of the  
calibration signal during the calibration procedure. In rare cases this error can  
occur after the OSA has received a severe mechanical shock. Try running  
AutoAlign”  
5009  
5010  
desc = I/O error”  
help = An error occurred while processing an input/output request”  
desc = The floppy disk is full”  
help = There is not enough free space left on the floppy disk to contain the new  
file(s). Either make room on the existing floppy by deleting unwanted files or try  
a different floppy disk.”  
5011  
desc = There is no disk in the floppy disk drive”  
help = An operation was requested which uses the floppy disk. There is no disk  
detected in the floppy disk drive. If there is a disk in the drive it may be of a  
format which cannot be read. This problem can be fixed by inserting a disk in the  
floppy disk drive or replacing the current disk with one which is properly  
formatted.”  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (3 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = The floppy disk is not formatted”  
5012  
help = An operation was requested which uses the floppy disk. The disk  
currently in the drive does not appear to be formatted. Use the format utility to  
format the disk or replace it with a formatted disk.”  
5013  
5014  
5015  
desc = The floppy disk is write protected”  
help = An operation was requested which writes to the floppy disk. The disk  
currently in the drive is write-protected. Turn off write protection on the current  
floppy disk or replace it with another disk.”  
desc = The internal memory is full”  
help = An operation was requested which uses internal memory. There is not  
enough free space left in internal memory for this operation. You must make  
room by deleting one or more files.”  
desc = Up/down keys will not alter the span when it is zero”  
help = The up/down step keys may not be used to alter the span setting when it  
is zero. A non-zero numeric value must be entered for span in order to leave zero  
span mode.”  
5016  
desc = Incompatible measurement file”  
help = An attempt was made to recall a measurement file which is  
incompatible with the current version of software.”  
5017  
desc = The requested file does not exist”  
help = An attempt was made to access a file which does not exist. Check the  
spelling of the file name against the listing of available files.”  
50205030  
desc = I/O Error”  
help An unexpected error occurred during the I/O operation. Please try the  
operation again. If the operation involves the floppy disk drive, try a different  
floppy disk. If the error persists, please make a note of the error number and  
contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument support center for  
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B Series Users  
Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service offices.  
5031  
desc = Could not initialize floppy”  
help => A request was made to initialize a floppy disk. The operation did not  
succeed. Check to see that there is a floppy disk inserted in the drive and that  
the disk is not write protected. This can also be caused by a defective floppy  
disk.”  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (4 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
50325043  
desc = I/O Error”  
help An unexpected error occurred during the I/O operation. Please try the  
operation again. If the operation involves the floppy disk drive, try a different  
floppy disk. If the error persists, please make a note of the error number and  
contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument support center for  
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B Series Users  
Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service offices.  
5044  
5045  
5046  
desc = Please cycle power to synchronize system time”  
help = The system time clock has been set backwards. Due to internal system  
requirements it is necessary to cycle power before continuing. Please turn  
power off and back on again. This must be done to ensure proper system  
operation.”  
desc = Sweep limit markers too close together”  
help = The sweep limit function is on and the line markers are too close  
together. The OSA cannot limit the sweep range to such a small value. The  
current sweep may be using a wider range than requested. Move the line  
markers farther apart or turn off sweep limit to resolve this problem.”  
desc = AutoAlign cannot find input signal at marker”  
help = The auto-align procedure could not find a usable input signal. If there is  
an active marker auto-align will attempt to align at the marker wavelength  
without searching for a signal peak. This error can also occur if the input signal  
amplitude is very low or if the OSA has received a large mechanical shock or if  
the input signal is removed after the auto-align procedure has begun. Be sure a  
signal is connected to the optical input. If there is an active marker make sure it  
is placed on the input signal or turn off all markers.”  
5047  
5048  
desc = Signal disappeared during AutoAlign”  
help = The auto-align procedure did not complete. The input signal disappeared  
during the auto-align procedure. Make sure the input signal is connected to the  
optical input and try again.”  
desc = Wrong trace X axis units for peak to center”  
help = The peak-to-center function was requested. This function will only  
execute if the active trace X axis has units of meters (um nm pm). Change the  
active trace to one with an X axis in meters or re-measure the active trace in a  
non-zero span.”  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (5 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Wrong marker X axis units for active trace”  
5049  
help = The active marker cannot be placed on the active trace because the  
desired X axis units do not match the X axis units of the active trace. This is  
normally caused by recalling a wavelength trace in zero span or a zero span  
trace in a wavelength span. It can also be caused by loading a trace with  
conflicting units by remote control.”  
5050  
5051  
desc = Trace not displayed: wrong X axis units”  
help = View has been turned on for this trace but it cannot be displayed. The X  
axis units in the trace do not match the X axis units being displayed. This is  
normally caused by trying to view a wavelength trace in zero span or a zero span  
trace in a wavelength span. It can also be caused by loading a trace with  
conflicting units by remote control.”  
desc = AutoMeasure cannot find input signal at marker”  
help = The auto-measure function was requested. The auto-measure at marker  
option was enabled but the active marker was not placed on a valid signal. A  
valid signal was found but the active marker is too far from that signal. To  
correct this problem place the marker on the desired signal turn off all markers  
or disable the auto-measure at marker function.”  
5052  
5053  
desc = Sweep time auto is not allowed in zero span”  
help = The sweep time function was requested to switch from manual to auto  
while in zero span. Automatic sweep time coupling cannot be done in zero span.  
The desired sweep time must be set explicitly.”  
desc = Noise marker not allowed.”  
help = A request was made to enable the noise marker readout. The readout  
cannot be enabled for one of the following reasons. Noise markers cannot be  
used on traces which have X axis units other than meters. This typically occurs  
in zero span where the X axis units are seconds. Noise markers cannot be used  
on traces which have Y axis units other than power. This typically happens when  
trace math is on and the trace Y axis represents a ratio.”  
5054  
desc = Bandwidth markers are not allowed in zero span”  
help = A request was made to enable the bandwidth marker readout while the  
OSA was in zero span. Bandwidth markers are not permitted when span is set to  
zero. If a bandwidth marker readout is required set span to a value greater than  
zero.”  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (6 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
5055  
desc = Firmware Upgrade was not successful”  
help => A firmware upgrade operation was requested. The firmware upgrade  
operation cannot be done at this time due to an internal software problem. + <-  
.serviceCenterHelp  
5056  
5057  
desc = Trajectory align cannot find input signal”  
help = The trajectory align procedure cannot find a usable input signal. Make  
sure you have a signal connected to the optical input.”  
desc = Invalid settings for trajectory align”  
help = The external trajectory align function was requested. It cannot be  
executed because the start and/or stop wavelength settings are invalid. Start  
and stop wavelengths must be between 600nm and 1700nm. In addition the  
difference between start and stop wavelengths (span) must be greater than  
25nm. To correct this problem adjust the start and/or stop wavelength settings  
to be valid.”  
5058  
5059  
desc = Out of memory”  
help = The OSA has run out of execution memory. An internal function was  
aborted due to lack of execution memory. The correction for this problem is to  
cycle power.”  
desc = Trajectory align: marginal input signal”  
help = The trajectory align procedure was aborted due to an input signal with  
marginal amplitude. The input signal was large enough when the function began  
its operation but later became too small. This usually happens when the signal  
is on the edge of being too small. To correct this problem increase the input  
signal level. If this is not possible then a slight increase in signal level can  
sometimes be achieved by cleaning optical fiber connectors.”  
5060  
5061  
desc = Trajectory align failed”  
help = The trajectory align procedure failed. The trajectory adjustments  
computed were invalid. This is usually occurs after the OSA has received a large  
mechanical shock. To correct this problem try the trajectory align procedure  
again. If the error persists, contact the Agilent support center nearest your  
location.”  
desc = Invalid marker trace”  
help = The marker could not be positioned. The marker is on a trace which does  
not contain any valid data. This is sometimes caused by a trace math result  
which is invalid.”  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (7 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = ADC Triggered Sweep Too Fast”  
5062  
help = A sweep was taken with one of the ADC trigger modes enabled. The  
sweep rate was too fast to allow trace data to be acquired for every  
wavelength. To resolve this problem increase sweep time or increase the  
frequency the external trigger input signal.”  
5063  
5064  
5065  
desc = Key disabled during applications”  
help = The key you pressed is not active while an application is running. Exiting  
the application should re-enable the key.”  
desc = Invalid measurement file”  
help = An attempt was made to recall a measurement file which is contains  
invalid or corrupt data.”  
desc = Error detected in DSP sub-system”  
help = The Digital Signal Processor has reported an unexpected error. Please  
record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If the error  
persists, contact the Agilent support center nearest your location.”  
5066  
5067  
desc = Error in Enhanced Wavelength Calibration”  
help = Enhanced Wavelength Calibration failed. Check OSA system. If the error  
persists, contact the Agilent Service Center.  
desc = OSNR marker not allowed.”  
help = A request was made to enable the OSNR marker readout. The readout  
cannot be enabled for one of the following reasons: OSNR markers cannot be  
used on traces which have X axis units other than meters. This typically occurs  
in zero span where the X axis units are seconds. OSNR marks cannot be used on  
traces which have Y axis units other than power. this typically happens when  
trace math is on and the trace Y axis represents a ratio.”  
5068  
5069  
5070  
desc = The configured SHARE does not exist.”  
help = A request was made to a remote file or printer share that does not exist  
or cannot be found.”  
desc = The configured SHARE cannot be accessed.”  
help = A request was made to a remote file or printer share that cannot be  
accessed using the configured USER, PASSWORD, or DOMAIN/WORKGROUP.”  
desc = Trajectory add failed.”  
help = The trajectory add procedure failed. This usually occurs when the  
trajectory table is full or the computed trajectory table is invalid. The correct this  
problem, try AUTO ALIGN PRESET and the AUTO ALIGN & ADD TO TRAJECTORY  
procedure again. If the error persists, contact the Agilent Service Center.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (8 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
6700  
desc = Math expression input parameter undefined.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because one or more input  
arguments are undefined. Please check the spelling of all input arguments.”  
6701  
6702  
desc = Math expression input parameter has error.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because an error is present on  
one or more of the input arguments. The error must be cleared before the  
expression can be evaluated.”  
desc = Math expression parameter has zero length.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because one or more input  
arguments has a zero length. This is often caused when the subset of a trace  
contains no points such as when advanced line marker functions are turned on  
and the line markers are too close together. It can also be caused when peak/pit  
searches find no peaks or pits.”  
6720  
6721  
6722  
6723  
desc = Math expression input parameter has error.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because of improper input  
arguments. This could be due to one or more input arguments having the wrong  
type or size or because one or more inputs are not defined.”  
desc = Internal error in marker search”  
help => A marker search function has failed due to an internal software  
problem. Please try the operation again. If the error persists, contact the  
Agilent support center nearest your location.”  
desc = Math expression input cannot be boolean.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because one or more of the  
input arguments is boolean. This function does not allow boolean input  
arguments.”  
desc = Trace X axis values do not match.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the input arguments  
have differing X axis values. This function requires that all input arguments have  
identical X axis values. All trace inputs must be taken with identical start/stop  
settings.”  
6724  
desc = Error in source trace”  
help => The source trace has an error. The error may possibly be that the source  
trace contains no points. Please try the operation again. If the error persists,  
contact the Agilent support center nearest your location.”  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (9 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Trace lengths do not match.”  
6725  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the inputs have  
differing sizes (trace lengths). All inputs to this function must be of the same  
size.”  
6726  
6727  
desc = Trace lengths do not match.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the inputs have  
differing sizes (trace lengths). All inputs to this function must be of the same  
size.”  
desc = Y axis counts do not match.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the inputs have  
differing numbers of Y axis data. All input arguments to this function must have  
the same number of Y axis data points.”  
6728  
6729  
6730  
6731  
desc = Incorrect number of inputs for math expression”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the number of input  
arguments to the function is incorrect.”  
desc = Math expression expects units of dBm.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the input argument  
does not have the required Y axis units of dBm.”  
desc = Math expression expects units of watts.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the input argument  
does not have the required Y axis units of watts.”  
desc = Illegal combination of trace Y axis units”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the combination of Y  
axis units in the input arguments do not make sense. For example it is valid to  
divide watts by watts or to divide watts by a unitless value but it is invalid to  
divide a unitless value by watts.”  
6732  
desc = Illegal combination of trace X axis units”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because the input arguments  
have differing X axis units. All input arguments must have identical X axis units.  
This commonly happens when trace math is attempted between a zero span  
trace (time units) and a non-zero span trace (wavelength units).”  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (10 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
6733  
desc = Invalid combination of Y axis units”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid  
combination of Y axis units. The math operation being performed only allows  
one of the arguments to have units. All other arguments must be unitless. The  
math operator is shown in parenthesis in the short message above. For example  
multiplying a trace in watts (dBm) by another trace in watts (dBm) is not  
permitted.”  
6734  
6735  
6736  
6737  
desc = Too many inputs have Y axis units”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid  
combination of inputs. Only one input argument is allowed to have non-blank Y  
axis units.”  
desc = Trace has too many Y axes”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid input.  
One of the arguments contains multiple sets of Y data. Only one set of Y data is  
allowed for this math function.”  
desc = Math expression expects boolean inputs.”  
help = A math expression could not be evaluated because of an invalid input.  
The math function requires all of its arguments to be boolean. At least one of  
the arguments is not boolean.”  
desc = Invalid math constant”  
help = During evaluation of a math expression an invalid constant was  
encountered. The constant has undefined or default settings for its X and/or Y  
values.”  
6738  
6739  
desc = Out of memory”  
help = A trace or math operation was requested. There is insufficient memory  
available to perform the operation. Try reducing trace length or cycle power.”  
desc = Too many peaks or pits”  
help = A marker search operation was requested. There are too many valid pits  
or peaks in the current trace. Reduce the number of valid pits or peaks by  
increasing the peak or pit excursion setting.”  
6741  
desc = Constant with multiple Y values”  
help = During evaluation of a math expression a constant was encountered  
which contains more than one Y value. Constants are only permitted to have one  
Y value.”  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (11 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Requested amplitude not found”  
6742  
help = A math expression to search for a specific amplitude in a trace did not  
succeed. There are no trace points with the desired amplitude.”  
6744  
6745  
desc = Excursion should be in dB”  
help = The units for the excursion are not in dB.”  
desc = Log of a negative number is not allowed.”  
help = During evaluation of a math expression the logarithm of a negative  
number was encountered.”  
6746  
desc = Math expression contains a circular reference.”  
help = A new math expression was entered. The expression was rejected  
because it would create a circular reference. For example if trace math for trace  
C is set to (A-B) then setting trace math for trace B to (C+D) would create a  
circular reference.”  
6747  
6748  
6749  
6750  
desc = Next peak not found”  
help = A next-peak search was requested. There are no more peaks on the  
current markers trace in the requested direction. To find additional peaks  
reduce the marker peak excursion setting or adjust sensitivity.”  
desc = Next pit not found”  
help = A next-pit search was requested. There are no more pits on the current  
markers trace in the requested direction. To find additional pits reduce the  
marker pit excursion setting or adjust sensitivity.”  
desc = Peak not found”  
help = A peak search was requested. There are no valid peaks on the current  
markers trace. Try decreasing the marker peak excursion setting or adjust the  
sensitivity setting.”  
desc = Pit not found”  
help = A pit search was requested. There are no valid pits on the current  
markers trace. Try decreasing the marker pit excursion setting or adjust the  
sensitivity setting.”  
6751  
6752  
desc = Trace has no centroid”  
help = The trace has no centroid. This may occur because the sum of trace  
pointsamplitudes is zero or there a no trace points.”  
desc = The reference point is outside trace bounds”  
help = The reference points wavelength is either too small or too large. The  
reference point will be clipped to a trace endpoint.”  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Warnings  
Table 5-6. OSA Warnings (12 of 12)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
6753  
desc = The window specified is invalid.”  
help = The window specified is invalid. The window should be a constant.”  
6754  
desc = Search failed: no data”  
help = A marker search operation was requested. After clipping the trace data  
to screen limits and line marker limits (if enabled) there was no data to search.  
This can be caused when all trace data points are beyond current X axis screen  
limits or when there are no trace data points between the line markers. Trace  
data values which exceed the current Y axis screen limits will not cause this  
problem. Adjust the current X axis screen limits and/or move the line markers to  
include at least one trace data point.”  
6755  
6756  
desc = Attempt to divide by 0”  
help = At least one point was attempted to be divided by 0. The result for these  
divisions has been set to not-a-number. Please realize that further calculations  
with not-a-number values are undefined.”  
desc = Syntax error; bad token: “  
help = The grammar expression entered cannot be parsed. Please check the  
string entered. The bad token attempts to indicate where the error occurred. The  
end of line indicates that the OSA expected more information. Please consult  
the manual for additional help.”  
7998  
7999  
desc = Unknown error detected”  
help = An unlisted error was reported by the instrument software. If this error  
persists contact Agilent Technologies for assistance.”  
desc = The warning list has overflowed”  
help = The Warning list has overflowed. The last entries received have been  
deleted.”  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (1 of 6)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Incorrect application type is listed in spec file.”  
8001  
help = The application expects the first non-comment line of the specification  
file to contain the APPLICATION keyword followed by the application type.  
Either the APPLICATION keyword was missing or the wrong application type  
was specified for this particular application.”  
8002  
8003  
desc = A keyword cannot be used as a variable name.”  
help = The application has a list of keywords reserved for specification file use.  
These reserved words cannot be used as a name for one of the measurement  
parameters.”  
desc = The variable name has already been used.”  
help = The application allows new names to be assigned to measurement  
parameters. Once assigned these names can only be used as inputs to other  
measurements. Only the first ten characters are significant. The line number  
indicates where the problem was found. The word in the parentheses is the  
variable name causing the problem.”  
8004  
8005  
desc = Wrong number of input parameters.”  
help = The wrong number of inputs were found for a specification file  
command. The line number listed is where the problem was found in the  
specification file. The first number in parentheses is the number of inputs found  
and the second number is the number of inputs required.”  
desc = An input parameter has the wrong units.”  
help = One of the input parameters to the specification file has the wrong units  
specified. The line number listed is where the problem was found in the  
specification file. The first units listed in the parentheses was the units used by  
the parameter and the second units is the units required by the parameter. An  
empty pair of quotes indicates unitless.”  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (2 of 6)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
8006  
desc = The specification file cannot be imported.”  
help = An error occurred while trying to import the specification file. Refer to  
the previous warnings for more information on specific errors in the  
specification file.”  
8007  
8008  
8009  
desc = The specification file has a syntax error.”  
help = One of the specification file lines has a syntax problem. The problem  
occurred on the line number listed. The string in the parentheses caused the  
problem.”  
desc = A variable was used where a constant is expected.”  
help = A variable name was used as a parameter where only a constant value  
or the DEFAULT keyword is allowed. The line number indicates where the  
problem was found. The variable name in the parentheses caused the problem.”  
desc = The variable name has not been defined.”  
help = An undefined variable name was used as a parameter for a  
specification. All variables used as parameters must be defined in a  
specification statement preceding the variables use. The line number indicates  
where the problem was found. The variable name in the parentheses is the  
undefined variable.”  
8010  
8011  
desc = A variable can be used only once per statement.”  
help = A variable name was used as multiple parameters for the same  
specification statement. The input parameter was ignored because using  
multiple references is not allowed. The line number indicates where the problem  
was found. The variable name in the parentheses is the variable causing the  
problem.”  
desc = A keyword was used where a variable is expected.”  
help = The application specification file has a list of reserved words which are  
used to specify the measurements to be made. These keywords cannot be used  
as input parameters for specification statements. The input parameter was  
ignored for this case. The line number indicates where the problem was found.  
The word in the parentheses is the reserved word causing the problem.”  
8012  
8013  
desc = A label is required to identify the spec file.”  
help = The label string is used to identify the specification file. It is required  
after specifying the application type. An empty string (pair of double quotes) is  
acceptable input.”  
desc = The specification file cannot be exported.”  
help = An error occurred while trying to export the specification file.”  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (3 of 6)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Print statement ignored: no path is specified”  
8014  
help = The PRINT statement needs to be after a PATH statement to indicate  
which PATH data is to be printed. The PRINT statement at the line number  
specified came before any PATH statement. This PRINT statement will not  
trigger any printouts.”  
8015  
desc = DEFAULT cannot be used for a parameter.”  
help = A parameter cannot be specified as DEFAULT. The parameter needs to  
be either a previously defined variable name or an actual value. The bad  
parameter was found on the line number specified. The number in the  
parentheses is the number of the parameter causing the problem.”  
8016  
8017  
8018  
desc = A duplicate command is in the spec file.”  
help = Certain commands should be used only once in the specification file. The  
duplicate command was found on the line number specified. The command in  
the parentheses is the duplicate.”  
desc = A required command is missing from the spec file.”  
help = Certain commands must be used in the specification file. The missing  
command is listed in the parentheses. This command should be used only once  
in the file.”  
desc = The normalization interval limited to maximum.”  
help = The normalization interval has a maximum value of 24 and a minimum  
value of 0.1 hours. The interval specified in the specification file is outside this  
range. The specification file can still be used but the calibration interval will be  
24 hours.”  
8019  
8020  
desc = The spec file could not be loaded.”  
help = The application found a problem with the specification file. Possible  
causes can include the following: the file is incompatible with the application  
the file is from a previous version of the application the file was corrupted. The  
file with the problem is specified within the parentheses. Try re-importing the  
specification file.”  
desc = The default spec file was loaded.”  
help = The default specification file for the application was loaded. This is done  
when the application is first started or if a problem occurred when trying to load  
another specification file. Refer to the previous warnings for information on any  
problems loading another file.”  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (4 of 6)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
8021  
desc = The spec file could not be found.”  
help = The application tried to load a specification file which could not be found  
in the internal memory. This may have occurred if the last file used by the  
application was deleted. The filename is specified within the parentheses.”  
8022  
8023  
desc = A closing quote is missing.”  
help = The specification file contained a line with an opening quote but no  
closing quote could be found.”  
desc = A default path name was used.”  
help = The imported specification file was given a default path name. All  
specification files must have at least one PATH statement before any of the  
measurement statements. A default path name was used either because some  
measurement statements were used before a PATH statement or there was no  
PATH statement at all in the file.”  
8024  
8025  
desc = A variable is expected.”  
help = The statement expected a variable as an input parameter. The line  
number indicates which statement did not have the proper input parameter  
type.”  
desc = The path name has already been used.”  
help = The application allows new names to be assigned to measurement  
paths. Once assigned these names can no longer be used by other measurement  
paths. Only the first thirty-two characters are significant. The line number  
indicates where the problem was found. The word in the parentheses is the path  
name causing the problem.”  
8026  
8027  
desc = A path name was used where a variable is expected.”  
help = The input parameters for measurement statements can take variables as  
inputs. These variables are the results of other measurement statements. A path  
name is the name of a measurement path not the result of a measurement and  
cannot be used as an input parameter. The input parameter was ignored for this  
case. The line number indicates where the problem was found. The word in the  
parentheses is the path name causing the problem.”  
desc = A parameter value was outside the legal range.”  
help = A parameter value was used which was outside the allowable range.  
The first number in the parentheses is the number of the parameter causing the  
problem. The other two numbers are the minimum and maximum values  
allowed. These values are in base units (e.g meters watts).”  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (5 of 6)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = A minimum non-zero span is required.”  
8028  
help = The application cannot run in a zero span setting. The start and stop  
wavelength must be separated by a minimum span. The line number indicates  
the line in the specification file which had a start and stop wavelength pair that  
did not meet the minimum span requirement.”  
8029  
8030  
8031  
8032  
desc = The requested function is not yet implemented.”  
help = The statement within the specification file is not implemented in this  
version of the application. The word in parentheses has been reserved for future  
use. The statement at the specified line number needs to be removed before the  
specification file can be imported.”  
desc = A SETUP statement is needed before SWEEP.”  
help = The wavelength limits of the SWEEP statement are checked against the  
wavelength limits in the SETUP statement. This check requires that the SETUP  
statement occur before the SWEEP statement. The line number indicates which  
SWEEP statement is not preceded by the SETUP statement.”  
desc = The SWEEP limits are outside the SETUP range.”  
help = The start and stop values for the SWEEP statement must be within the  
start and stop values of the SETUP statement. The line number indicates which  
SWEEP statement has values out of range. The number in the parentheses  
indicates which parameter is out of range.”  
desc = The units of the inputs are not compatible.”  
help = The units of the inputs to a math operation need to be compatible with  
the operation desired. Addition and subtraction need to have matching units.  
Multiplication needs to have a unitless parameter. Division needs a unitless  
denominator or the units for the numerator and denominator need to match. The  
line number indicates which statement had the mismatched input units.”  
8033  
8034  
desc = The reference point is outside the SETUP range.”  
help = The reference point value must be within the start and stop values of the  
SETUP statement. The line number indicates which statement had the value out  
of range.”  
desc = The values are associated with different axes.”  
help = The variables used in a basic math operation like ADD or DIV must be  
associated with the same data axis (e.g. wavelength or amplitude). Mixing the  
axes values within a single math operation is not allowed. The line number  
indicates which statement had the incompatible variables.”  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Application-Specific Warnings  
Table 5-7. Application-Specific Warnings (6 of 6)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
8035  
desc = The search limits are outside the SETUP range.”  
help = The search limits for statements like PEAK or CENTER_OF_MASS must  
be within the start and stop values of the SETUP statement. The line number  
indicates which statement has values out of range. The number in the  
parentheses indicates which parameter is out of range.”  
8036  
8037  
desc = The specification units do not match.”  
help = The units for the minimum and maximum specification values need to  
match. The line number indicates which statement has the mismatching units.”  
desc = The specification units do not match the input units.”  
help = The units for the minimum and maximum specification values need to  
match the units for the input parameters. The line number indicates which  
statement has the mismatching units.”  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
OSA Status Errors  
OSA Status Errors  
Table 5-8. OSA Status Errors  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Sweep Uncalibrated”  
10000  
help = The current setting of sweep time may be too fast. This could result in an  
invalid measurement. In certain cases it is possible to sweep faster than the  
coupled sweep time without compromising measurement accuracy. Please refer  
to the users manual and relevant application notes for more information.”  
11998  
desc = Too Many Hardware Status Errors”  
help = The Hardware Status Error list has overflowed. Additional more recent  
items have been deleted.”  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
OSA Errors  
OSA Errors  
Table 5-9. OSA Errors (1 of 2)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
20001  
desc = Error detected in ADC sub-system”  
help = An error has been detected in the Analog-to-Digital converter  
subsystem. Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and  
cycle power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies  
Instrument support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See  
the Agilent 86140B Series Users Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and  
service offices.”  
20002  
20003  
20004  
desc = Error detected in slit positioning system”  
help = An error has been detected in the motor which controls the resolution  
bandwidth slit wheel. Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the  
error and cycle power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Agilent  
Technologies Instrument support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800)  
403- 0801. See the Agilent 86140B Series Users Guide for a listing of the  
Agilent sales and service offices.”  
desc = Error detected in grating positioning system”  
help = An error has been detected in the motor which controls the diffraction  
grating. Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle  
power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument  
support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the  
Agilent 86140B Series Users Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service  
offices.”  
desc = Monochromator calibration data is invalid”  
help = Factory calibration data for the monochromator is invalid. Please record  
the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If the error  
persists, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument support center for  
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B Series Users  
Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service offices.”  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Listings  
OSA Errors  
Table 5-9. OSA Errors (2 of 2)  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
desc = Trans-Impedance calibration data is invalid”  
20005  
help = Factory calibration data for the trans-impedance amplifier is invalid.  
Please record the hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If  
the error persists, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument support  
center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B  
Series Users Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service offices.”  
20006  
20007  
desc = Monochromator flatness calibration data is invalid”  
help = Factory flatness data for the monochromator is invalid. Please record the  
hexadecimal number listed with the error and cycle power. If the error persists,  
contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument support center for  
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B Series Users  
Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service offices.“  
desc = Sweep Timeout”  
help = A sweep was started but did not finish in the expected amount of time.  
The trace data acquired during this sweep may not be valid. Try taking another  
sweep. If the error persists, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument  
support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the  
Agilent 86140B Series Users Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service  
offices.”  
21999  
desc = The Error list has overflowed”  
help = The Error list has overflowed. The last entries received have been  
deleted.”  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Listings  
Firmware Errors  
Firmware Errors  
Table 5-10. Firmware Errors  
Error Number  
Error Description [description/explanation/examples]  
30000  
desc = Internal Communications Error”  
help = An internal software error has occurred involving communications  
between different software processes. Please record this error including the  
extra text and cycle power. If the error persists, contact the nearest Agilent  
Technologies Instrument support center for assistance. In the U.S., call (800)  
403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B series Users Guide for a listing of the  
Agilent sales and service offices.”  
30001  
desc = Auto-Measure Software Error”  
help = An error has been detected in the auto-measure software. There is an  
internal problem with the software. Please make a note of the text in  
parentheses at the end of the error message and cycle power. If the error  
persists, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Instrument support center for  
assistance. In the U.S., call (800) 403-0801. See the Agilent 86140B series Users  
Guide for a listing of the Agilent sales and service offices.”  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Changing the Printer Paper 6-2  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements 6-8  
Returning the Instrument for Service 6-21  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance  
Changing the Printer Paper  
Changing the Printer Paper  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
Changing the Printer Paper  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Avoid dropping the coin or screwdriver, used to open the printer door, into the  
printer assembly.  
Always use Agilent brand paper to ensure quality printing and long printer life.  
Order paper as Agilent part number 9270-1370.  
Never use the printer without printer paper as this can damage the printer  
head.  
If the instrument is on, the paper feeder automatically scrolls whenever paper  
is inserted into the feeder.  
Lift the paper latch to correct paper alignment problems. The scroll knob al-  
lows you to manually advance the paper.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage caused by losing parts and tools inside the instrument, always  
turn the instrument off before installing the printer paper.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure  
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure  
Lint from normal use of the printer may eventually collect on the printer head  
and degrade print quality. Use the procedure provided in this section to clean  
the printer head. Also refer to Changing the Printer Paperon page 6-2.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
This servicing procedure is for use by qualified personnel only. To  
avoid elect rical shock, do not perform this procedure unless you are  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy the printer. Therefore,  
this procedure must always be performed at a static-safe work station.  
St at ic-safe Work  
St at ion  
Figure 6-1 on page 6-5 shows an example of a static-safe work station using  
conductive table and floor mats and wrist and heel straps. To ensure user  
safety, the static-safe accessories must provide at least 1 Mof isolation from  
ground. Refer to Table 6-1 for information on ordering static-safe accessories.  
Table 6-1. Static-Safe Accessories  
Agilent Part  
Description  
Number  
9300-0797  
3M static control mat 0.6 m × 1.2 m (2 ft× 4 ft) and 4.6 cm (15 ft) ground  
wire. (The wrist-strap and wrist-strap cord are not included. They must be  
ordered separately.)  
9300-0980  
Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft).  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Maintenance  
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure  
Figure 6-1. Example of a static-safe workstation  
Table 6-2. Printer Accessories  
To clean the  
print er head  
Agilent Part Number  
9270-1605  
Description  
Printer Paper  
1 Turn off the Agilent 86140B series optical spectrum analyzer, and remove the  
line power cord.  
2 Place the instrument at a static-safe work station as described in the  
introduction to this procedure.  
3 Use a coin or screwdriver to open the printer door that is located on the top of  
the instrument.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance  
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure  
CAUTION  
Avoid dropping the coin or screwdriver, used to open the printer door, into the  
printer assembly.  
4 Lift up the paper latch as shown in the following diagram, and remove the  
paper.  
5 Unscrew the retaining screw that secures the sheet-metal cover that protects  
the printer head from electrostatic discharge. Slide the sheet-metal cover  
towards the retaining screw and then lift it straight up to remove.  
6 Lift the printer head lever to the vertical position. Then, tilt the lever towards  
the instruments rear panel to rotate the printer head up.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Printer Head Cleaning Procedure  
7 Clean the printer head using a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol.  
CAUTION  
Use of other cleaning materials or fluids may damage the printer.  
8 After the printer head has thoroughly dried, use the printer head lever to  
return the printer head to its original position.  
9 Replace and secure the sheet-metal cover for the printer head.  
10 Replace the printer paper, and close the printer access door.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate  
Measurements  
Today, advances in measurement capabilities make connectors and connec-  
tion techniques more important than ever. Damage to the connectors on cali-  
bration and verification devices, test ports, cables, and other devices can  
degrade measurement accuracy and damage instruments. Replacing a dam-  
aged connector can cost thousands of dollars, not to mention lost time! This  
expense can be avoided by observing the simple precautions presented in this  
book. This book also contains a brief list of tips for caring for electrical connec-  
tors.  
Choosing the Right Connector  
A critical but often overlooked factor in making a good lightwave measure-  
ment is the selection of the fiber-optic connector. The differences in connec-  
tor types are mainly in the mechanical assembly that holds the ferrule in  
position against another identical ferrule. Connectors also vary in the polish,  
curve, and concentricity of the core within the cladding. Mating one style of  
cable to another requires an adapter. Agilent Technologies offers adapters for  
most instruments to allow testing with many different cables. Figure 6-2 on  
page 6-9 shows the basic components of a typical connectors.  
The system tolerance for reflection and insertion loss must be known when  
selecting a connector from the wide variety of currently available connectors.  
Some items to consider when selecting a connector are:  
How much insertion loss can be allowed?  
Will the connector need to make multiple connections? Some connectors are  
better than others, and some are very poor for making repeated connections.  
What is the reflection tolerance? Can the system take reflection degradation?  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Is an instrument-grade connector with a precision core alignment required?  
Is repeatability tolerance for reflection and loss important? Do your specifica-  
tions take repeatability uncertainty into account?  
Will a connector degrade the return loss too much, or will a fusion splice be re-  
quired? For example, many DFB lasers cannot operate with reflections from  
connectors. Often as much as 90 dB isolation is needed.  
Figure 6-2. Basic components of a connector.  
Over the last few years, the FC/PC style connector has emerged as the most  
popular connector for fiber-optic applications. While not the highest perform-  
ing connector, it represents a good compromise between performance, reli-  
ability, and cost. If properly maintained and cleaned, this connector can  
withstand many repeated connections.  
However, many instrument specifications require tighter tolerances than most  
connectors, including the FC/PC style, can deliver. These instruments cannot  
tolerate connectors with the large non-concentricities of the fiber common  
with ceramic style ferrules. When tighter alignment is required, Agilent  
Technologies instruments typically use a connector such as the Diamond  
HMS-10, which has concentric tolerances within a few tenths of a micron. Agi-  
lent Technologies then uses a special universal adapter, which allows other  
cable types to mate with this precision connector. See Figure 6-3.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Figure 6-3. Universal adapters to Diamond HMS-10.  
The HMS-10 encases the fiber within a soft nickel silver (Cu/Ni/Zn) center  
which is surrounded by a tough tungsten carbide casing, as shown in  
Figure 6-4.  
Figure 6-4. Cross-section of the Diamond HMS-10 connector.  
The nickel silver allows an active centering process that permits the glass fiber  
to be moved to the desired position. This process first stakes the soft nickel  
silver to fix the fiber in a near-center location, then uses a post-active staking  
to shift the fiber into the desired position within 0.2 µm. This process, plus the  
keyed axis, allows very precise core-to-core alignments. This connector is  
found on most Agilent Technologies lightwave instruments.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
The soft core, while allowing precise centering, is also the chief liability of the  
connector. The soft material is easily damaged. Care must be taken to mini-  
mize excessive scratching and wear. While minor wear is not a problem if the  
glass face is not affected, scratches or grit can cause the glass fiber to move  
out of alignment. Also, if unkeyed connectors are used, the nickel silver can be  
pushed onto the glass surface. Scratches, fiber movement, or glass contamina-  
tion will cause loss of signal and increased reflections, resulting in poor return  
loss.  
Inspecting Connectors  
Because fiber-optic connectors are susceptible to damage that is not immedi-  
ately obvious to the naked eye, poor measurements result without the user  
being aware. Microscopic examination and return loss measurements are the  
best way to ensure good measurements. Good cleaning practices can help  
ensure that optimum connector performance is maintained. With glass-to-  
glass interfaces, any degradation of a ferrule or the end of the fiber, any stray  
particles, or finger oil can have a significant effect on connector performance.  
Where many repeat connections are required, use of a connector saver or  
patch cable is recommended.  
Figure 6-5 shows the end of a clean fiber-optic cable. The dark circle in the  
center of the micrograph is the fibers 125 µm core and cladding which carries  
the light. The surrounding area is the soft nickel-silver ferrule. Figure 6-6  
shows a dirty fiber end from neglect or perhaps improper cleaning. Material is  
smeared and ground into the end of the fiber causing light scattering and poor  
reflection. Not only is the precision polish lost, but this action can grind off the  
glass face and destroy the connector.  
Figure 6-7 shows physical damage to the glass fiber end caused by either  
repeated connections made without removing loose particles or using  
improper cleaning tools. When severe, the damage of one connector end can  
be transferred to another good connector endface that comes in contact with  
the damaged one. Periodic checks of fiber ends, and replacing connecting  
cables after many connections is a wise practice.  
The cure for these problems is disciplined connector care as described in the  
following list and in Cleaning Connectorson page 6-15.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Use the following guidelines to achieve the best possible performance when  
making measurements on a fiber-optic system:  
Never use metal or sharp objects to clean a connector and never scrape the  
connector.  
Avoid matching gel and oils.  
Figure 6-5. Clean, problem-free fiber end and ferrule.  
Figure 6-6. Dirty fiber end and ferrule from poor cleaning.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Figure 6-7. Damage from improper cleaning.  
While these often work well on first insertion, they are great dirt magnets. The  
oil or gel grabs and holds grit that is then ground into the end of the fiber.  
Also, some early gels were designed for use with the FC, non-contacting con-  
nectors, using small glass spheres. When used with contacting connectors,  
these glass balls can scratch and pit the fiber. If an index matching gel or oil  
must be used, apply it to a freshly cleaned connector, make the measurement,  
and then immediately clean it off. Never use a gel for longer-term connections  
and never use it to improve a damaged connector. The gel can mask the extent  
of damage and continued use of a damaged fiber can transfer damage to the  
instrument.  
When inserting a fiber-optic cable into a connector, gently insert it in as  
straight a line as possible. Tipping and inserting at an angle can scrape material  
off the inside of the connector or even break the inside sleeve of connectors  
made with ceramic material.  
When inserting a fiber-optic connector into a connector, make sure that the fi-  
ber end does not touch the outside of the mating connector or adapter.  
Avoid over tightening connections.  
Unlike common electrical connections, tighter is n ot better. The purpose of  
the connector is to bring two fiber ends together. Once they touch, tightening  
only causes a greater force to be applied to the delicate fibers. With connec-  
tors that have a convex fiber end, the end can be pushed off-axis resulting in  
misalignment and excessive return loss. Many measurements are actually  
improved by backing off the connector pressure. Also, if a piece of grit does  
happen to get by the cleaning procedure, the tighter connection is more likely  
to damage the glass. Tighten the connectors just until the two fibers touch.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Keep connectors covered when not in use.  
Use fusion splices on the more permanent critical nodes. Choose the best con-  
nector possible. Replace connecting cables regularly. Frequently measure the  
return loss of the connector to check for degradation, and clean every connec-  
tor, every time.  
All connectors should be treated like the high-quality lens of a good camera.  
The weak link in instrument and system reliability is often the inappropriate  
use and care of the connector. Because current connectors are so easy to use,  
there tends to be reduced vigilance in connector care and cleaning. It takes  
only one missed cleaning for a piece of grit to permanently damage the glass  
and ruin the connector.  
Mea suring insertion loss a nd return loss  
Consistent measurements with your lightwave equipment are a good indica-  
tion that you have good connections. Since return loss and insertion loss are  
key factors in determining optical connector performance they can be used to  
determine connector degradation. A smooth, polished fiber end should pro-  
duce a good return-loss measurement. The quality of the polish establishes  
the difference between the PC(physical contact) and the Super PCcon-  
nectors. Most connectors today are physical contact which make glass-to-glass  
connections, therefore it is critical that the area around the glass core be clean  
and free of scratches. Although the major area of a connector, excluding the  
glass, may show scratches and wear, if the glass has maintained its polished  
smoothness, the connector can still provide a good low level return loss con-  
nection.  
If you test your cables and accessories for insertion loss and return loss upon  
receipt, and retain the measured data for comparison, you will be able to tell in  
the future if any degradation has occurred. Typical values are less than 0.5 dB  
of loss, and sometimes as little as 0.1 dB of loss with high performance con-  
nectors. Return loss is a measure of reflection: the less reflection the better  
(the larger the return loss, the smaller the reflection). The best physically  
contacting connectors have return losses better than 50 dB, although 30 to  
40 dB is more common.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Visua l inspection of fiber ends  
Visual inspection of fiber ends can be helpful. Contamination or imperfections  
on the cable end face can be detected as well as cracks or chips in the fiber  
itself. Use a microscope (100X to 200X magnification) to inspect the entire  
end face for contamination, raised metal, or dents in the metal as well as any  
other imperfections. Inspect the fiber for cracks and chips. Visible imperfec-  
tions not touching the fiber core may not affect performance (unless the  
imperfections keep the fibers from contacting).  
WARNING  
Always remove both ends of fiber-optic cables from any instrument,  
system, or device before visually inspecting t he fiber ends. Disable all  
optical sources before disconnect ing fiber-opt ic cables. Failure t o do  
so may result in permanent injury to your eyes.  
Cleaning Connectors  
The procedures in this section provide the proper steps for cleaning fiber-  
optic cables and Agilent Technologies universal adapters. The initial cleaning,  
using the alcohol as a solvent, gently removes any grit and oil. If a caked-on  
layer of material is still present, (this can happen if the beryllium-copper sides  
of the ferrule retainer get scraped and deposited on the end of the fiber during  
insertion of the cable), a second cleaning should be performed. It is not  
uncommon for a cable or connector to require more than one cleaning.  
CAUTION  
Agilent Technologies strongly recommends that index matching compounds  
not be applied to their instruments and accessories. Some compounds, such as  
gels, may be difficult to remove and can contain damaging particulates. If you  
think the use of such compounds is necessary, refer to the compound  
manufacturer for information on application and cleaning procedures.  
Table 6-3. Cleaning Accessories  
Item  
Agilent Part Number  
Cotton swabs  
8520-0023  
9300-1223  
Small foam swabs  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Table 6-4. Dust Caps Provided with Lightwave Instruments  
Item  
Agilent Part Number  
Laser shutter cap  
FC/PC dust cap  
Biconic dust cap  
ST dust cover  
08145-64521  
08154-44102  
08154-44105  
1401-0291  
To clea n a non-lensed connector  
CAUTION  
Do not use any type of foam swab to clean optical fiber ends. Foam swabs can  
leave filmy deposits on fiber ends that can degrade performance.  
1 Apply pure isopropyl alcohol to a clean lint-free cotton swab or lens paper.  
Cotton swabs can be used as long as no cotton fibers remain on the fiber end  
after cleaning.  
2 Clean the ferrules and other parts of the connector while avoiding the end of  
the fiber.  
3 Apply isopropyl alcohol to a new clean lint-free cotton swab or lens paper.  
4 Clean the fiber end with the swab or lens paper.  
Do not scrub during this initial cleaning because grit can be caught in the  
swab and become a gouging element.  
5 Immediately dry the fiber end with a clean, dry, lint-free cotton swab or lens  
paper.  
6 Blow across the connector end face from a distance of 6 to 8 inches using  
filtered, dry, compressed air. Aim the compressed air at a shallow angle to the  
fiber end face.  
Nitrogen gas or compressed dust remover can also be used.  
CAUTION  
Do not shake, tip, or invert compressed air canisters, because this releases  
particles in the can into the air. Refer to instructions provided on the  
compressed air canister.  
7 As soon as the connector is dry, connect or cover it for later use.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
If the performance, after the initial cleaning, seems poor try cleaning the con-  
nector again. Often a second cleaning will restore proper performance. The  
second cleaning should be more arduous with a scrubbing action.  
To clea n a n a da pter  
The fiber-optic input and output connectors on many Agilent Technologies  
instruments employ a universal adapter such as those shown in the following  
picture. These adapters allow you to connect the instrument to different types  
of fiber-optic cables.  
Figure 6-8. Universal adapters.  
1 Apply isopropyl alcohol to a clean foam swab.  
Cotton swabs can be used as long as no cotton fibers remain after cleaning. The  
foam swabs listed in this sections introduction are small enough to fit into  
adapters.  
Although foam swabs can leave filmy deposits, these deposits are very thin, and  
the risk of other contamination buildup on the inside of adapters greatly out-  
weighs the risk of contamination by foam swabs.  
2 Clean the adapter with the foam swab.  
3 Dry the inside of the adapter with a clean, dry, foam swab.  
4 Blow through the adapter using filtered, dry, compressed air.  
Nitrogen gas or compressed dust remover can also be used. Do not shake, tip,  
or invert compressed air canisters, because this releases particles in the can  
into the air. Refer to instructions provided on the compressed air canister.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Care of Connector Savers  
The connector saver is used to protect the input connector of the OSA from  
damage. It functions as a standoff between the front panel input connector  
and the input fiber. If the fibers are not thoroughly cleaned, repeated connec-  
tions can result in a scratched, chipped, or dirty input connector. Contamina-  
tion, or damage to the connector, will cause loss of signal and increased  
reflections resulting in poor return loss and measurement error. With glass-to-  
glass interfaces, any degradation of a ferrule or fiber endface, any stray parti-  
cles, or finger oil on the endface can have a significant effect on connector  
performance. Many times an instrument must be serviced to replace a dam-  
aged connector when thousands of dollars and lost time could have been  
avoided if better care were given to the fiber optic connector.  
The connector saver is intended to serve as a replaceable interface. When  
cleaned and attached to the front panel, it should remain in place and succes-  
sive input fiber changes should be attached to the connector saver. If the con-  
nector saver is damaged, you can easily replace it. Connector saver damage  
can be detected by examining the connector saver with a fiber scope, a reflec-  
tometer, or substituting a new connector saver (and observing a difference in  
the measurement).  
The connector saver should be cleaned before any connection. While the con-  
nector saver is provided to protect the front panel input connector from dirty  
fibers, the fiber and connector saver must be cleaned. Any dirt between fiber  
connections causes high insertion loss and increased reflections and can also  
damage the fibers themselves. The advantage to using the connector saver is  
that if it is damaged, it is much less expensive and faster to replace than the  
front panel input connector.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Cleaning Connector Savers  
The two ends of the connector saver should be cleaned differently. The ferrule  
fiber end of the connector saver can be cleaned in the same manner as a fiber  
patch cord, or a cable, using the method described below. The recessed fiber  
end of the input connector saver presents a different cleaning challenge.  
Because of the limited access within the recessed end, it is not recommended  
that alcohol be used in the cleaning process. If not quickly wiped away with  
another cotton swab, or blown dry with compressed air, alcohol can leave a  
residue which interferes with measurements. We have found that in the  
recessed end of the connector saver, it is difficult to prevent this alcohol resi-  
due buildup.  
Recessed End  
Ferrule End  
To clean t he ferrule end of t he connect or saver  
1 Apply isopropyl alcohol to a clean cotton swab.  
Cotton swabs can be used making sure no cotton fibers remain after cleaning.  
Although foam swabs can leave filmy deposits, these deposits are very thin.  
The risk of other contamination buildup on the connection surface greatly out-  
weighs the risk of contamination by foam swabs.  
2 Clean the adapter with a wet swab.  
3 Clean the adapter with a clean, dry swab.  
4 Blow across the adapter using filtered, dry, compressed air.  
CAUTION  
Do not shake, tip, or invert compressed air canisters. This releases particles  
from the can into the air flow. Refer to the instructions on the compressed air  
canister.  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
To clean t he recessed end of t he connect or saver  
To clean the recessed end of the connector saver, it is recommended that a  
wrapped tip swab or stick cleaner be used. Berkshires LT670183 wrapped tip  
cotton swab, or Cletop stick cleaners have proven to be an effective cleaning  
solution. To clean the recessed end of the connector saver, insert the stick type  
cleaner, and rotate it server times the same direction. Each swab should only  
be used once. While this may not remove all of the contaminants, it will displace  
them away from the center of the fiber (away from the core).  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
Agilent Technologies aims to maximize the value you receive, while  
minimizing your risk and problems. We strive to ensure that you get the test  
and measurement capabilities you paid for and obtain the support you need.  
Our extensive support resources and services can help you choose the right  
Agilent products for your applications and apply them successfully. Every  
instrument and system we sell has a global warranty. Support is normally  
available for at least five years beyond the production life of the product. Two  
concepts underlie Agilents overall support policy: Our Promiseand Your  
Advantage.  
Our Promise means your Agilent test and measurement equipment will meet  
its advertised performance and functionality. When you are choosing new  
equipment, we will help you with product information, including realistic  
performance specifications and practical recommendations from experienced  
test engineers. When you use Agilent equipment, we can verify that it works  
properly, help with product operation, and provide basic measurement  
assistance for the use of specified capabilities, at no extra cost upon request.  
9Often, many self-help tools are available.  
Your Advant age means that Agilent offers a wide range of additional expert  
test and measurement services, which you can purchase according to your  
unique technical business needs. Solve problems efficiently and gain a  
competitive edge by contracting with us for calibration, extra-cost upgrades,  
out-of-warranty repairs, and on-site education and training, as well as design,  
system integration, project management, and other professional engineering  
services. Experienced Agilent engineers and technicians worldwide can help  
you maximize your productivity, optimize the return on investment of your  
Agilent instruments and systems, and obtain dependable measurement  
accuracy for the life of those products.  
By internet, phone, or fax, get assistance with your test and measurement  
needs.  
Online assist ance: www.agilent.com/find/assist  
United States  
(tel) 1 800 452 4844  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
Latin America  
(tel) (305) 269 7500  
(fax) (305) 269 7599  
Canada  
(tel) 1 877 894 4414  
(fax) (905) 206 4120  
Australia  
(tel) 1 800 629 485  
(fax) (61 3) 9210 5947  
Europe  
(tel) (31 20) 547 2323  
(fax) (31 20) 547 2390  
New Zealand  
(tel) 0 800 738 378  
(fax) 64 4 495 8950  
Japan  
(tel) (81) 426 56 7832  
(fax) (81) 426 56 7840  
Asia Pacific  
(tel) (852) 3197 7777  
(fax) (852) 2506 9284  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
Preparing the instrument for shipping  
1 Write a complete description of the failure and attach it to the instrument.  
Include any specific performance details related to the problem. The following  
information should be returned with the instrument.  
Type of service required.  
Date instrument was returned for repair.  
Description of the problem:  
Whether problem is constant or intermittent.  
Whether instrument is temperature-sensitive.  
Whether instrument is vibration-sensitive.  
Instrument settings required to reproduce the problem.  
Performance data.  
Company name and return address.  
Name and phone number of technical contact person.  
Model number of returned instrument.  
Full serial number of returned instrument.  
List of any accessories returned with instrument.  
2 Cover all front or rear-panel connectors that were originally covered when you  
first received the instrument.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Cover electrical connectors to protect sensitive components from electrostatic  
damage. Cover optical connectors to protect them from damage due to physical  
contact or dust.  
Instrument damage can result from using packaging materials other than the  
original materials. Never use styrene pellets as packaging material. They do not  
adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton.  
They may also cause instrument damage by generating static electricity.  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
3 Pack the instrument in the original shipping containers. Original materials are  
available through any Agilent Technologies office. Or, use the following  
guidelines:  
Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage  
caused by electrostatic discharge.  
For instruments weighing less than 54 kg (120 lb), use a double-walled, cor-  
rugated cardboard carton of 159 kg (350 lb) test strength.  
The carton must be large enough to allow approximately 7 cm (3 inches) on  
all sides of the instrument for packing material, and strong enough to accom-  
modate the weight of the instrument.  
Surround the equipment with approximately 7 cm (3 inches) of packing ma-  
terial, to protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton. If  
packing foam is not available, the best alternative is S.D-240 Air Capfrom  
Sealed Air Corporation (Commerce, California 90001). Air Cap looks like a  
plastic sheet filled with air bubbles. Use the pink (antistatic) Air Capto  
reduce static electricity. Wrapping the instrument several times in this ma-  
terial will protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton.  
4 Seal the carton with strong nylon adhesive tape.  
5 Mark the carton FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE.  
6 Retain copies of all shipping papers.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
General Instrument Specifications 7-11  
Option 001 Current Source 7-16  
Option 002 White Light Source 7-17  
Option 004/005 EELED Sources 7-18  
Regulatory Information 7-21  
Declaration of Conformity 7-22  
Specifications and Regulatory  
Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
This chapter contains specifications and characteristics for Agilent 8614xB  
optical spectrum analyzers (OSA).  
The specifications in this chapter apply to all functions autocoupled over the  
temperature range 0°C to +55°C and relative humidity < 95% (unless otherwise  
noted).  
All specifications apply after the instruments temperature has been stabilized  
after 1 hour continuous operation and the auto-align routine has been run.  
Unless otherwise noted, specifications apply without USER CAL.  
All specifications apply to measurements made withou t using the front-panel  
connector saver.  
Calibration Cycle This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. The instrument  
should have a complete verification of specifications at least once every two  
years.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Definition of Terms  
Definition of Terms  
Characteristics  
and specifications lows:  
Specification s describe warranted performance.  
The distinction between specifications and characteristics is described as fol-  
Characteristics provide useful, but nonwarranted information about the func-  
tions and performance of the instrument. Characteristics are prin ted in  
italics.  
Wavelength  
Absolu te Accu racy (after u ser cal) refers to the wavelength accuracy after  
the user has performed the internal wavelength calibration using a source of  
known wavelength.  
Tuning Repeatability refers to the wavelength accuracy of returning to a  
wavelength after having tuned to a different wavelength.  
Reprodu cibility refers to the amount of wavelength drift which can occur  
over the specified time while the optical spectrum analyzer is swept across a  
source of known wavelength.  
Resolution  
FWHM refers to the Full-Width-Half-Maximum resolutions that are available.  
This indicates the width at the half power level of the signal after passing  
through the resolution slits.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Definition of Terms  
Amplit ude  
Scale Fidelity refers to the potential errors in amplitude readout at ampli-  
tudes other than at the calibration point. This specification is sometimes  
called linearity.  
Flatn ess defines a floating band which describes the error in signal amplitude  
over the indicated wavelength range. (This error may be removed at a given  
wavelength by performing the user amplitude calibration.)  
Polarization Depen den ce refers to the amplitude change that can be seen by  
varying the polarization of the light entering the OSA. This is not to be con-  
fused with amplitude variations caused by the varying distribution of energy  
between the different modes in fiber that is multimode at the wavelength of  
interest.  
Sensit ivity  
Sen sitivity is defined as the signal level that is equal to six times the RMS  
value of the noise. Displayed sensitivity values are nominal. Slightly lower val-  
ues may have to be entered to achieve specified sensitivity.  
Dynamic range  
Sweep time  
Dyn amic Ran ge is a measure of the ability to see low-level signals that are  
located very close (in wavelength) to a stronger signal. In electrical spectrum  
analyzers, this characteristic is generally called shape factor.  
Maximu m Sweep Rate refers to the maximum rate that the instrument is  
able to acquire data and display it. This rate may be limited by multiple inter-  
nal processes when using default number of trace points.  
Sweep Cycle Time refers to the time required to make a complete sweep and  
prepare for the next sweep. It can be measured as the time from the start of  
one sweep to the start of the next sweep.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Specifications  
NOTE  
The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
Table 7-1. Wavelength Specifications  
Wavelength Range  
Reproducibility 1 mina  
Span Range  
600 nm to 1700 nm  
±0.002 nm  
0.2 nm to full range and zero span  
Accuracy  
After calibration with internal calibration source and  
with enhanced wavelength calibration on for  
, ,  
specified rangea b c  
1480 to 1570 nm  
±0.01 nm  
±0.025 nm  
1570 to 1620 nm  
After calibration with external reference source(s)  
±0.01 nm  
±0.2 nm  
±10 nm of calibration reference point(s)a, b, c  
After user calibration over full wavelength rangea,  
600 nm - 1700 nm  
d
±0.5 nm  
a,d,  
e
Absolute Accuracy  
Tuning Repeatability(1 min)a  
±0.002 nm  
Span Linearitya,b,d  
1525 nm - 1570 nm  
for spans <40 nm  
±0.01 nm  
±0.02 nm  
a. With applied input fiber 9/125µm  
b. Characteristic  
c. At room temperature  
d. Temperature range 20 to 30°C  
e. Factory calibration on a 2-year cycle  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-2. Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) Specifications  
Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)  
Agilent 86140B,  
86142B, 86143B,  
86145B  
Agilent 86141B,  
86140B w/Opt 025,  
86143B w/Opt 025  
Agilent 86144B,  
86146Ba  
,
FWHM (3 dB Bandwidth)b c  
0.06, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5,  
10 nm  
0.06, 0.07, 0.1, 0.14, 0.2,  
0.33, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 nm  
0.07, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2,  
5, 10 nm  
Noise Marker Bandwidth Accuracy  
using noise markers 1525-1610 nma,  
d
2%  
±2%  
±3%  
±7%  
±12%  
±3%  
±5%  
±10%  
-----  
0.5 nm  
0.2 nm  
0.1 nm  
±3%  
±7%  
±12%  
0.06 nm  
a. The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
b. With applied input fiber 9/125 µm  
c. Resolution of 10 nm is available for first order grating response only  
d. Temperature range 20 to 30°C  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-3. Amplitude Specifications  
Amplitude  
Agilent 8614xBa  
Sensitivityb  
600-750 nm  
750-900 nm  
900-1250 nm  
,
c d  
60 dBm  
75 dBm  
75 dBm  
90 dBm  
80 dBm  
c.d  
c
c
1250-1610 nm  
e
1610-1700 nm  
Maximum Measurement  
,
Powerf g  
+15 dBm per channel,  
+30 dBm total  
+15 dBm per channel,  
+30 dBm total  
+12 dBm per channel,  
+30 dBm total  
1525-1700 nm  
600-1000 nm  
1000-1525 nm  
Maximum Safe Power  
Total safe power  
Total power within any 10 nm  
portion of the spectrum  
+30 dBm  
+23 dBm  
Absolute Accuracyh  
at 20 dBm, 1310 nm/1550 nm  
±0.5 dB  
Scale Fidelitye,  
i
Autorange off  
± 0.05 dB  
± 0.07 dB  
Autorange on  
Display Scale (log scale)  
0.01-20 dB/DIV.  
120 to +90 dBm  
Amplitude Stability  
(1310 nm, 1550 nm)  
1 minutej  
15 minutesg  
±0.01 dB  
±0.02 dB  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Amplitude  
Agilent 8614xBa  
Agilent 86141B,  
86140B W/Opt 025,  
86143B w/Opt 025  
Agilent 86140B, 86143B,  
86144B  
Agilent 86142B, 86145B,  
86146B  
Flatnessk  
1290-1330 nm  
1525-1570 nm  
1525-1610 nm  
-----  
-----  
±0.2 dB  
-----  
±0.2 dB  
±0.7 dB  
±0.2 dB  
±0.2 dB  
-----  
-----  
l
1250-1610 nm  
-----  
-----  
Polarization Dependencek,  
,
m n  
1310 nm  
----  
± 0.25 dB  
± 0.2 dB  
± 0.25 dB  
± 0.3 dB  
± 0.12 dB  
± 0.05 dB  
± 0.08 dB  
± 0.25 dB  
1530 nm, 1565 nm  
1600 nm  
----  
----  
1250 to 1650 nm  
± 0.5 dB  
a. The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
b. Sensitivity is defined as signal value >6 X RMS noise value  
c. Temperature range 0 to 30° C  
d. Second Order  
e. Temperature range 20 to 30° C  
f. Resolution bandwidth setting <channel spacing  
g. Characteristic  
h. For resolution 0.1 nm  
i. Excluding amplitude errors at low power levels due to noise  
j. For signals within 8 dB of top of screen  
k. With applied input fiber 9/125 µm  
l. Absorption of light by atmospheric moisture affects flatness at 1350-1420 nm  
m. For resolution 0.2 nm  
n. Room temperature  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-4. Dynamic Range Specifications  
Agilent 86141B and  
86140B Option 025,  
86143B w/Opt 025  
Agilent 86140B, 86143B,  
86144Ba  
Agilent 86142B, 86145B,  
86146Ba  
In 0.1 nm resolution  
,
bandwidthb c  
1250 to 1610 nm (chop mode on)  
±0.5 nm, ±1 nm, ±5 nm  
,
d e  
–70 dB  
60 dB  
–58 dB  
–55 dB  
–40 dB  
–70 dB  
60 dB  
58 dB  
55 dB  
–40 dB  
–70 dB  
60 dB  
–55 dB  
1550 nm at ±0.8 nm  
f
(±100 GHz at 1550 nm)  
g
1550 nm at ±0.5 nm  
(±62.5 GHz at 1550 nm)  
g
1550 nm at ±0.4 nm  
–52 dB  
----  
(±50 GHz at 1550 nm)  
1550 nm at ±0.2 nm d  
(±25 GHz at 1550 nm)  
a. The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
b. Excluding multiple order grating response  
c. With applied input fiber 9/125 µm  
d. Characteristic  
e. Chop mode not available on the 86144B, 86146B models  
f. Average of all states of polarization  
g. Characteristic for 86140B, 86141B, 86143B, 86140B with option 025, 86143B with option 025  
Table 7-5. Monochromator Input Specifications  
Monochromator Input  
Agilent 8614xBa  
>35 dB  
,
Input Return Lossb c  
>35 dB  
>35 dB  
a. The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
b. Depends on the quality of the attached connector  
c. With a 9/125 µm straight connector  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-6. Sweep Specifications  
Sweep  
Agilent 8614xBa  
Maximum Sweep Rateb  
40 nm/56.3 ms  
Maximum Sampling Rate in  
Zero Spanb  
50 µs/trace point  
Sweep Cycle Timeb  
50 nm span, auto zero off  
50 nm span, auto zero on  
100 nm span  
<180 ms  
<340 ms  
<400 ms  
<650 ms  
500 nm span  
ADC Trigger Accuracyb  
Jitter (distributed uniformly)  
Trigger delay range  
<±0.5 µs  
2 µs-6.5 ms  
a. The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
b. Characteristic  
Table 7-7. Pulse Mode Accuracy Specifications  
Agilent 86141B and  
86140B Option 025,  
86143B w/Opt 025  
Agilent 86142B, 86145B,  
86146Ba  
Agilent 86140B, 86143B,  
PULSE MODE ACCURACY  
86144Ba  
Turn On (2 µs after rising  
< ± 0.2 dB  
< ± 0.2 dB  
< ± 0.2 dB  
,
edge) b c  
Turn Off (10 µs after falling  
d
< ± 0.2 dB  
<± 0.2 dB  
< ± 0.2 dB  
edge)  
(30 dB extinction)  
a. The 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 50 µm internal path only.  
b. Characteristic  
c. Starting from dark  
d. Characteristic for 86140B, 86141B, 86143B, 86144B, 86146B, 86140B w/Opt 025, 86143B w/Opt 025  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-8. General Instrument Specifications  
Agilent 86140B, 86141B and 86142B,  
Agilent 86143B, 86144B, and 86145B  
Portable  
86146B Benchtop  
222 mm H × 425 mm W × 427 mm D  
(8.8 in × 16.8 in × 16.8 in)  
163 mm H × 325 mm W × 427 mm D  
(6.4 in × 12.8 in × 16.8 in)  
Dimensions  
16.5 kg (36 lb)  
14.5 kg (31 lb)  
Weight  
Environmental  
Temperaturea  
Humidity  
Altitude  
EMI  
Operating: 0°C to 55°C; Storage: 40°C to 70°C  
Operating: < 95% RH; Storage: Non-condensing  
Up to 15,000 feet (4,572 meters)  
Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with  
CISPR Publication 11, IEC 801-3, IEC 801-4, and IEC 555-2  
Power Requirements  
Voltage and Frequency  
90 Vac to 260 Vac, 44 to 444 Hz  
230 W  
Maximum Power Consumption  
Computer Interfacing  
Remote Control  
Compatibility  
Interfaces  
Web enabled controls  
IEEE-488.1, IEEE-488.2 (100%)  
GPIB, Parallel Printer Port, External VGA Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse (PS/2)  
3.5 inch 1.44 MB, MS-DOS®  
Floppy Disk  
Data Export  
Spreadsheet and Word Processor Compatible (CSV ASCII)  
CGM, PCL, GIF  
Graphics Export  
Instrument Drivers  
Universal Instrument Drivers (PNP), Compatible with Agilent VEE,  
++  
Labview®, Visual Basic and C  
a. Floppy disk and printer operating temperature range 0 °C to 45 °C.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Additional Specifications for the 86141B  
WARNING  
The light emit ted from t he MONOCHROMATOR INPUT connector is filtered  
and slightly at tenuat ed light input to the front-panel MONOCHROMATOR  
INPUT connector. Light can radiat e from t he front panel in t he following  
inst rument modes: filter mode, ext ernal path, and st imulus response.  
Table 7-9. Additional SpecificationsAgilent 86141B  
Monochromator Insertion Loss (into 62.5 µm fiber)  
a
(See characteristic plot)  
850 nm  
1300 nm  
< 19 dB  
< 7 dB  
1550 nm  
< 10 dB  
Maximum Input Power  
+30 dBm total, +23 dBm within any 10 nm portion of the  
spectrum  
Monochromator Output  
Polarization Dependence b, for Resolutions 0.2 nm  
1250 nm1650 nm  
,
± 0.5 dB c d  
Resolution Selections (FWHM)  
Input:  
0.07 nm and 0.1 nm to 10 nm in a 1,2,5 sequence  
50 µm  
Output:  
62.5 µm  
Photodetector Input (in power meter mode)  
,
Accuracy at 20 dBm e f (1550 nm)  
± 0.35 dB  
Maximum Safe Power Level  
+20 dBm  
d,  
g
Scale Fidelity (for 0 dBm inputs)  
For any measurement with fixed reference level  
± 0.05 dB  
± 0.07 dB  
For multiple measurements with different reference  
levels  
Display Resolution  
Log  
0.01 dB  
Linear  
0.23% of measurement + 0.01% of reference level  
Power Range (up to 50 dB in any reference level setting)  
Maximum Displayed Leveld  
1250 nm1610 nm  
10 dBm  
d,  
h
Sensitivity  
95 dBm  
± 0.4 dB  
Flatness (for 0 dBm input) d,e  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Characteristic Monochromator Loss  
Monochromator Loss  
2nd Order  
0
–3  
1st Order  
–6  
–9  
–12  
–15  
–18  
–21  
–24  
–27  
700 800 850 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 150015501600 nm  
a. Second order is selected when the stop wavelength is at or below 900 nm and resolution is <10 nm  
b. With applied input fiber that is standard single mode at wavelength of interest.  
c. At room temperature.  
d. Characteristic  
e. With applied input fiber 9/125 µm.  
f. Temperature range 20°C to 30°C  
g. To within 20 dB of the sensitivity noise limit.  
h. Sensitivity applied within 1 minute of last zeroing  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Agilent 86144B/86146B Additional Specifications  
WARNING  
NOTE  
The light emit ted from t he MONOCHROMATOR INPUT connector is filtered  
and slightly at tenuat ed light input to the front-panel MONOCHROMATOR  
INPUT connector. Light can radiat e from t he front panel in t he following  
inst rument modes: filter mode, ext ernal path, and st imulus response.  
The following 86144B and 86146B specifications are for the 9 µm filter mode only.  
Table 7-10. Additional SpecificationsAgilent 86144B/86146B  
Insertion Loss Stabilitya  
1550 nm  
15 minutes  
0.5 dB  
b
Insert ion Loss  
10 dB max  
1550 nm  
a. Immediately following enhanced single point auto align, at constant temperature.  
b. For room temperature only.  
Table 7-11. Additional SpecificationsAgilent 86144B/86146B  
Agilent 86146B  
Agilent 86144B  
Filter Bandwidtha,b  
0.5 dB  
1.0 dB  
3.0 dB  
0.5 dB  
1.0 dB  
3.0 dB  
RBW Nominal  
Setting  
Actual Bandwidth  
0.04 nm  
0.05 nm  
0.07 nm  
0.1 nm  
0.2 nm  
0.3 nm  
0.5 nm  
0.016  
0.019  
0.033  
0.076  
0.134  
0.257  
0.421  
0.023  
0.026  
0.044  
0.089  
0.147  
0.270  
0.434  
±20%  
0.039  
0.045  
0.063  
0.115  
0.173  
0.297  
0.460  
0.016  
0.019  
0.033  
0.076  
0.134  
0.257  
0.421  
0.023  
0.026  
0.044  
0.089  
0.147  
0.270  
0.434  
±30%  
0.039  
0.045  
0.063  
0.115  
0.173  
0.297  
0.460  
a. From 1530-1610 nm  
b. Characteristic  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-12. Filter Bandwidth  
Adjacent Channel  
Agilent 86146B  
Agilent 86144B  
12.5 GHz  
25 GHz  
50 GHz  
100 GHz  
±0.8 nm  
50 GHz  
±0.4 nm  
100 GHz  
±0.8 nm  
Rejection (at 1550nm)a  
±0.1 nm  
±0.2 nm  
±0.4 nm  
0.04 nm  
0.05 nm  
0.07 nm  
0.1 nm  
0.2 nm  
0.3 nm  
0.5 nm  
40 dB  
40 dB  
----  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
40 dB  
40 dB  
----  
55 dB  
55 dB  
55 dB  
50 dB  
45 dB  
45 dB  
45 dB  
55 dB  
55 dB  
55 dB  
55 dB  
55 dB  
55 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
45 dB  
40 dB  
40 dB  
40 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
50 dB  
45 dB  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
a. Characteristic  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-13. Option 001 Current Source  
Current Output  
Agilent 86140B, 86141B, 86142B, 86146B Only  
Range  
0 to ±200 mA (source or sink)  
50 µA steps  
2% ±50 µA  
Resolutiona  
Accuracy  
Clamp Voltageb  
±2.7V  
a
Noise Density at 1 kHz  
<4 nA/ Hz  
Stability Within 30 Minutesa  
Temperature Drifta  
<100 ppm ±500 nA  
<(100 ppm ±500 nA)/°C  
Pulse Mode  
Pulse Range  
Pulse Resolution  
Duty Cycle Range  
10 µs to 6.5 ms  
100 ns  
Pulse width/1 s to 100%  
a. Characteristic  
b. Nominal  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-14. Option 002 White Light Source  
Agilent 86140B, 86141B, 86142B, 86146B only  
Wavelengtha  
900 nm to 1700 nm  
b
Minimum Output Power Spectral Density  
900 to 1600 nm  
900 to 1600 nm (typical)  
1600 to 1700 nm  
67 dBm/nm (0.2 nW/nm)  
64 dBm/nm (0.4 nW/nm)  
70 dBm/nm (0.1 nW/nm)  
c d  
Minimum Output Power Spectral Density  
50 dBm/nm (10 nW/nm)  
46 dBm/nm (25 nW/nm)  
50/125 µm fiber  
62.5/125 µm fiber  
b
Output Stability  
±0.02 dB over 10 minutes  
>5000 hours  
Lamp Lifetime, Mean Time Between Failuresb  
a. Filtered below 850 nm.  
b. With applied input fiber 9/125 µm.  
c. Characteristic  
d. Includes power in full numerical aperture of fiber.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-15. Option 004/005 EELED Sources  
Agilent 86140B, 86141B, 86142B, 86146B only  
Minimum Spectral Power Density  
1540 to 1560 nm - option 005  
> 40 dBm/nm (100 nW/nm)  
> 60 dBm/nm (1 nW/nm)  
> 40 dBm/nm (100 nW/nm)  
> 60 dBm/nm (1 nW/nm)  
1470 to 1620 nm - option 005a  
1300 to 1320 nm, 1540 to 1560 nm - option 004  
1250 to 1620 nm - option 004a  
Return Lossa  
With straight connector  
>25 dB  
a
Stability (ambient temp <±1°C)  
<±0.02 dB  
<±0.05 dB  
Over 15 minutes  
Over 6 hours  
a. Characteristic  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Option 006 Wavelength Calibrator  
The wavelength calibrator option provides an onboard wavelength reference  
that can be used to automatically calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer. The  
calibrator is based on an EELED and an Acetylene gas absorption cell.  
Wavelength Calibrator Block Diagram  
The acetylene absorbs light at very specific wavelengths based on the molecu-  
lar properties of gas. The cell is illuminated by an EELED and the OSA uses  
the absorption pits to perform a wavelength calibration. Since the absorption  
of the acetylene gas is a physical constant, it never needs calibrating.  
Wavelength calibrator absorption spectrum  
The wavelength calibrator enhances the OSA to achieve better than ±10 pm  
wavelength accuracy and removes the need to use a tunable laser source and  
multi-wavelength meter as an external reference.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications  
Table 7-16. Additional Parts and Accessories  
Agilent Benchtop OSA  
86140B, 86141B, 86142B,  
86146B  
Agilent Portable OSA  
86143B, 86144B, 86145B  
Printer Paper (5 rolls/box)  
Additional Connector Interfaces  
External 10 dB Attenuator (FC/PC)  
9 µm Single Mode Connector Saver  
Rack-Mount Flange Kit  
9270-1370  
9270-1370  
See Agilent 81000 series  
Opt. 030  
See Agilent 81000 series  
Opt. 030  
Standard  
Standard  
Opt. AX4  
N/A  
Transit Case  
9211-2657  
N/A  
9211-5604  
Opt. 042  
Soft Carrying Case  
BenchLink Lightwave Softwarea  
Standard  
Standard  
a. Agilent N1031A BenchLink Lightwave allows transfer of measurement results over a GPIB Interface to a PC for the purposes of  
archiving, printing, and further analysis.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Regulatory Information  
Regulatory Information  
Laser Classification: This product contains an FDA Laser Class I (IEC Laser  
Class 1) laser.  
This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11.  
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with the standards  
listed on the Manufacturers Declaration of Conformity, and has been supplied  
in a safe condition. The documentation contains information and warnings that  
must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the prod-  
uct in safe condition.  
Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements  
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.  
Cet Appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB du Canada.  
Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration  
Acoustic Noise Emission  
LpA < 70 dB  
Geraeuschemission  
LpA < 70 dB  
Operator position  
Normal position  
per ISO 7779  
am Arbeitsplatz  
normaler Betrieb  
nach DIN 45635 t.19  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Declaration of Conformity  
Declaration of Conformity  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
function, 3-104  
setting, 3-14  
automatic  
alignment, 1-14  
Averaging softkey, 3-14  
A
absolute accuracy, 7-3  
accessories  
product, 1-8  
static-safe, 6-4  
accuracy  
absolute/differential, 7-3  
active  
Backup Internal Memory softkey, 2-20, 3-15  
Backup/Restore Menu softkey, 3-15  
bandwidth  
function area assist, 3-24  
Active Function Area Assist, 3-2  
active function area, moving, 2-12, 3-46  
Active Marker softkey, 3-3  
Active Marker.... softkey, 3-58  
Active Trace softkey, 3-3  
adapters, 1-8  
markers, 3-37  
bandwidth marker, 1-15  
interpolation, setting, 3-40  
units, setting, 3-40  
Bandwidth/Sweep menu, 1-22  
Agilent logo, 3-4  
Agilent logo, displaying, 3-23  
alignment  
automatic, 1-14  
C
calibrating the instrument, 3-60  
calibration  
cycle, 7-2  
date, 3-99  
date, viewing, 3-8  
AMPCOR, 3-8  
amplitude  
accuracy, increasing, 3-14  
correction, 3-8  
sensitivity, 3-81  
units, setting, 3-7  
Amplitude functions  
AMPCOR, 3-8  
Amplitude menu, 1-19  
amplitude setup panel  
auto range, 3-13  
auto zero, 3-14  
reference level position, 3-70  
units, 3-9  
power, 3-8  
care of fiber optics, 1-iii, 1-11  
Center Wavelength softkey, 3-18  
CGM, graphic saving, 2-22  
characteristics, 7-2  
Choose Files to Save softkey, 2-22  
classification, laser, 7-21  
cleaning  
adapters, 6-17  
fiber-optic connections, 6-8, 6-16  
non-lensed connectors, 6-16  
printer head, 6-4  
Configure Network softkey, 3-19  
connecting  
Applications functions  
filter mode, 3-85  
measurement mode, 3-45  
power meter mode, 3-62  
power meter zero, 3-63  
Applications menu, 1-17  
auto  
chop mode, setting, 3-8  
ranging, setting, 3-7  
zero, setting, 3-7  
printer, 1-10  
connector care, 6-8  
continuous sweep, 3-71  
cotton swabs, 6-15  
cycle time, sweep, 7-4  
Auto Align key, 1-14  
Auto Meas key, 1-14  
auto ranging, 3-13  
auto zero  
D
date  
displaying, 3-23  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
wavelength calibration, 3-101  
File menu, 1-17  
date, setting, 3-82  
File Share, 3-31  
dB per division, 3-79  
declaration of conformity, 7-22  
default instrument settings, 3-65  
Default Math softkeys, 3-20, 3-21  
Delete Menu softkey, 3-21  
delta between traces, 2-28  
delta marker, 1-15  
units, setting, 3-40  
Delta Marker softkey, 3-22  
display  
File Shares softkey, 3-27  
File Sharing, 3-97  
filename  
entering, 2-23  
saving, 2-22, 3-76  
filter mode, 3-85  
Filter Mode softkey, 3-29  
firmware revision, 3-73  
flatness, 7-4  
adding a title, 2-19  
Agilent logo, 3-23  
date/time, 3-23  
overview, 1-6  
printing, 1-16  
recalling data, 2-25  
saving data, 2-22, 3-77  
foam swabs, 6-15  
front panel  
scaling, 3-79  
title, 3-24  
descriptions, 1-4  
tutorial, 1-13  
display setup panel  
Agilent logo, 3-4  
time/date, 3-20, 3-92  
title, 3-92  
function area assist, 3-24  
function reference, 3-2  
FWHM resolution, 7-3  
Display Setup softkey, 3-23  
documentation, part numbers, 1-31  
Domain Name, 3-97  
dust caps, 6-16  
gateway address, 4-2  
GIF, 3-77  
GIF, graphic saving, 2-22  
GPIB & Network Setup, 3-31  
GPIB address, 3-19  
graphics data, saving, 2-22, 3-77  
dynamic range, 7-4  
E
Electrostatic (ESD) information, 6-4  
Exchange Menu softkey, 3-25  
Extended State Information softkey, 3-55  
external printer, 3-67  
Help softkey, viewing error messages, 3-31  
hi gain trans Z, 3-55  
F
Hold Trace softkey, 3-32  
factory  
wavelength calibration date, 3-101  
Factory Preset softkey, 3-25  
Fast Meas Save softkey, 3-26  
fast save, 2-20  
FDA laser safety, 1-29  
fiber optics  
INPUT connector, 1-iii, 1-11  
input connector, 6-8  
instrument  
address, 3-47  
checking the shipment, 1-8  
state, 3-56  
internal memory, 2-25  
care of, 1-iii, 1-11  
cleaning connections, 6-8  
connectors, covering, 6-23  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
backup/restore, 2-20  
saving data, 2-22, 3-77  
internal printer, 3-67  
active marker, 3-3  
All Off softkey, 3-5  
line markers, 3-102  
marker BW, 3-37  
internet protocol, 4-2  
interpolation, normal/delta marker, 3-40  
IP address, 4-2  
marker off, 3-37  
marker to center, 3-43  
marker to reference level, 3-43  
moving between traces, 2-28  
peak search, 3-58  
peak to center, 3-57  
search limit, 3-80  
tips for using, 2-27  
Markers key, 3-44  
maximum  
L
laser  
classifications, 1-29  
safety, 1-29  
warning, 1-29  
laser classification, 7-21  
Lin Math softkeys, 3-34  
line markers, 3-102  
Line Markers Off softkey, 3-33  
lo gain trans Z, 3-55  
Local key, 3-34  
sweep rate, 7-4  
Measure menu, 1-17  
measurement  
fast save, 2-20  
recalling data, 2-24  
recalling data in Fast Save mode, 2-24  
saving data, 2-21  
Log Math softkeys, 3-35, 3-36  
measurement modes  
power meter, 3-62  
Measurement Modes softkey, 3-45  
measuring  
delta between traces, 2-28  
passband, 3-37  
using markers, 2-27  
M
manual, part numbers, 1-31  
map display window, 4-12, 4-15  
marker  
search threshold, setting, 3-42  
tuning, single mode, 3-44  
types, 1-15  
Marker BW softkey, 3-37  
Marker menu, 1-23  
Marker Off softkey, 3-37  
Marker Search Menu softkey, 3-38  
marker setup panel  
bar, 1-17  
Move Power Display Area softkey, 3-46  
bandwidth marker interpolation, 3-16  
BW marker units, 3-17  
net mask, 4-2  
delta marker units, 3-22  
marker search threshold, 3-96, 3-97  
marker search threshold value, 3-38  
normal marker units, 3-50  
normal/delta marker interpolation, 3-50  
peak excursion, 3-57  
peak search at end of each sweep, 3-59  
pit excursion, 3-60  
Marker to Center softkey, 3-43  
Marker to Ref Level softkey, 3-43  
Marker Tune softkey, 3-44  
markers  
Network File Share, 3-31, 3-77  
network printers, 3-67  
network setup, 3-27  
Next Peak Down softkey, 3-58  
Next Peak Left softkey, 3-58  
Next Peak Right softkey, 3-58  
Next Peak softkeys, 3-47, 3-48  
Next Pit softkeys, 3-48, 3-49  
noise  
declaration, 7-21  
marker reference bandwidth, setting, 3-42  
markers, 1-15  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
non-normalized amplitude scale, 3-3  
normal marker, 1-15  
connecting, 1-10  
head cleaning, 6-4  
units, setting, 3-40  
normal/delta marker interpolation, 3-40  
normalized  
Printer Setup softkey, 3-67  
Printer Shares softkey, 3-67  
printing  
display scale, 3-3  
display, 1-16  
number of points, sweep, 3-88  
over network, 3-67  
printing, external or internal, 3-67  
product information, 1-12  
Pwr Mtr Units softkey, 3-63  
O
operating system revision, 3-73  
optimize sensitivity, 3-12  
Options menu, 1-17  
descriptions, 1-4  
recall data, 2-24  
Recall Menu softkey, 3-69  
recall setup panel  
measurement/trace data, 3-67  
recall from, 3-68  
P
package contents, 1-8  
packaging for shipment, 6-24  
panels, setup, 2-3  
part numbers, 1-31  
Peak Excursion softkey, 3-57  
peak excursion, setting, 3-41  
peak search, 3-80  
end of each sweep, setting, 3-42  
performing, 1-14  
REF annotation, 3-69  
reference level, 3-7  
reference level position, 3-70  
Reference Level softkey, 3-69  
reflection X, 4-7  
Peak Search softkey, 3-58  
Peak to Center softkey, 3-57  
Peak to Ref Level softkey, 3-59  
Perform Calibration softkey, 3-60  
pit excursion, 3-60  
pit excursion, setting, 3-41  
pit search, 3-80  
Pit Search softkey, 3-61  
polarization dependence, 7-4  
power calibration  
regulatory information, 7-21  
remote  
Remote File Sharing, 3-31, 3-77, 3-97  
remote front panel, 4-2  
remote setup panel, GPIB address, 3-47  
Repeat Sweep softkey, 3-71  
repeatability, tuning, 7-3  
reproducibility, 7-3  
Reset Min/Max Hold softkey, 3-73  
resets, 2-3  
resolution  
date, 3-8  
setting, 3-8  
Power Display softkey, 3-62  
power meter  
display, 3-62  
display area, moving, 3-46  
units, 3-63  
FWHM, 7-3  
restore internal memory, 2-20  
Restore Internal Memory softkey, 2-20, 3-73  
returning for service, 6-21  
Revision softkey, 3-73  
Power Meter Mode softkey, 3-62  
Power Meter Zero softkey, 3-63  
Preset key, 3-13, 3-65  
Print key, 1-16, 3-66  
printer  
S
safety information, 1-iii  
Save menu softkey, 3-75  
save setup panel  
changing the paper, 6-2  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
measurement/trace save, 3-74  
save to, 3-78  
save traces, 3-79  
Stop WL softkey, 3-87  
subnetwork mask, 4-2  
swabs, 6-15  
save, fast mode, 3-26  
save/recall functions  
fast recall, 2-24  
sweep  
continuous, 3-71  
cycle time, 7-4  
fast save, 2-20  
recalling data, 2-24  
rate, maximum, 7-4  
Sweep Key, 3-16  
Sweep Points softkey, 3-88  
system functions  
active area, moving, 2-12  
adding a title, 2-19  
System key, 3-91  
System menu, 1-25  
saving data, 2-21  
Save/Recall key, 3-78  
Save/Recall menu, 1-24  
saves, 2-3  
scale fidelity, 7-4  
Scale/Div softkey, 3-79  
screen, 2-20  
search Limit softkey, 3-80  
Search Mode softkey, 3-80  
selecting a measurement mode, 3-45  
selects, 2-3  
displaying, 3-23  
time, setting, 3-82  
title, creating, 2-19  
title, displaying, 3-92  
sensitivity, 7-4  
optimizing, 2-9, 3-12  
Sensitivity softkey, 3-81  
service  
resolution, 3-88  
save data, 3-77  
trace math  
exchange menu, 3-25  
linear, 3-34  
returning for, 6-21  
Set Time/Date softkey, 3-82  
Set Title softkey, title, displaying, 3-83  
Setup panel overview, 2-3  
sharing files, 3-27  
logarithmic, 3-35, 3-36  
measuring wl drift, 2-29  
traces  
shipment, checking package content, 1-8  
shipping procedure, 6-23  
Show Errors softkeys, 3-83, 3-84  
Show Notices softkey, 3-84  
Show Warnings softkey, 3-85  
signal source, setting, 3-102  
single mode  
Hold softkey, 3-32  
offset, 3-95  
recall data, 2-24  
reset hold, 3-73  
save data, 2-22  
update, 3-95, 3-96  
view, 3-100  
Traces key, 3-95  
Traces menu, 1-27  
transimpedance amplifier, 2-9, 3-55, 3-104  
TransZ 2-3 Lock softkey, 3-95  
tuning repeatability, 7-3  
alignment, 3-85  
Single Sweep softkey, 3-86  
softkey panels, 1-181-28  
source, single, 3-102  
Span softkey, zero span, 3-86  
specifications, 7-2  
Standard Product, Options, and Accessories,  
1-30  
Start WL softkey, 3-87  
State softkey, 3-56  
tutorial, getting started, 1-13  
static-safe  
accessories, 6-4  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
U
Update On/Off softkey, 3-95  
update trace, 3-96  
upgrading the firmware, 3-30  
user  
power cal date, 3-8  
wavelength calibration date, 3-101  
User Share, 3-31  
User Share Identity, 3-97  
User Wavelength Cal Date softkey, 3-99  
V
View Trace softkey, 3-100  
W
wavelength  
calibration date, 3-101  
referenced value, 3-102  
setting cal source, 3-102  
Wavelength Cal Info softkey, 3-100  
Wavelength key, 3-100  
Wavelength Line Mkr softkey, 3-102  
Wavelength menu, 1-28  
Wavelength Offset softkey, 3-103  
wavelength setup panel  
center wavelength step size, 3-19  
wavelength units, 3-104  
web site information, 1-12  
Win 32 emulator, 4-9  
X
X Win 32 emulator, 4-9  
X windows, 4-9, 4-12  
Z
Zero Now softkey, 3-8, 3-104  
zeroing  
the power meter, 3-63  
Index-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Acer Network Card WT 300 User Manual
Addonics Technologies Computer Hardware CPR5SA User Manual
Agilent Technologies Computer Drive E5070BU User Manual
Alliance Laundry Systems Washer HC100 User Manual
American Audio Musical Instrument Pro Scratch 2 User Manual
American Standard Bathroom Aids 5030LBW User Manual
Azden Barcode Reader PCS 9600D User Manual
Balance Scale KH 391 User Manual
Behringer Stereo System 101 User Manual
Behringer Stereo System XR12 User Manual